比丘威儀法詞典

Upanandana~

Upanandana~

⇒ NandanOpanandanā~

§ 1.1.1B1. āyuṣmāṃ Nandano saṃghasthaviro. Upanandano dvitīyasthaviro (= § 2.1.2B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4)

§ 49.1.41B6. āyuṣmanto Nandanasya Upanandano nāma bhrātā et passim

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-nāmaya- (BHS)

upa-nāmaya- (BHS)

“übergeben, überreichen; legen, stellen”

⇒ upa-nāme-

§ 8.5.9A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam āsiñcitavyaṃ

§ 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni

§ 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni, pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ

§ 8.7.9A4. yadi piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito bhavati, upanāmayitavyo

§ 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāto ukkaḍhitavyo piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo

§ 8.12.9B2. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbham upanāmayitavyaṃ

§ 10.5.10A5. pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhovayitavyā

§ 41.6.34A3. pādataṭṭhakaṃ (Hs. °taddhakaṃ) upanāmayitvā upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahāpocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati

§ 50.7.43B3. gacchitvā tasya upanāmetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-nāme- (BHS, Pā)

upa-nāme- (BHS, Pā)

“übergeben, überreichen”

⇒ upa-nāmaya-

§ 40.16.33B1. mātrāye upanāmetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upanāyika~

upa-ni-√dhā

§ 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... dakṣiṇāṃ bāhaṃ śirasy upanidhāya, ...

§ 30.7.25A4. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhāṃ śirasy upanidhāya, vāmāṃ bāhāṃ anukāyaṃ prasāritvā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-ni-mantraya-

upa-ni-mantraya-

“einladen”

⇒ ni-mantraya-, ni-mantre-

§ 39.22.32A1. eṣo dāni koci āraṇyakānāṃ bhaktenôpanimantrayati, vaktavyaṃ “grāmāntikānām api nimantrehî”ti

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-ne- (Pā)

upa-ne- (Pā)

“gebrauchen, benützen”#

☞ § 42.3, Anm. 8

§ 42.3.36A6. stokastokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā

§ 42.4.36A7. stokaṃ stokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā

§ 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ

§ 42.20.37A5. yāvadarthaṃ bhadantā upaneṃtu (Hs. upanetuṃ)

§ 42.20.37A5. evaṃ pi kṛtvā mātrāye upanetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A6)

§ 42.21.37A7. mātrāye upanetavyaṃ

§ 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-parīkṣa- (BHS, SWTF) (°pari-√īkṣ)

upa-parīkṣa- (BHS, SWTF) (°pari-√īkṣ)

“prüfen, untersuchen”;

vgl. Pā. upa-parikkhati

☞ § 38.8, Anm. 2

§ 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-makṣita~#

upa-makṣita~#

“beschmiert”;

< Skt. upa + mrakṣita

⇒ makṣita-parimakṣita~, √mrakṣ

§ 43.15.38B3. upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃga-rañjitaṃ (Hs. °-rakṣitaṃ) vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-yojaya-

upa-yojaya-

§ 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ tailaṃ upayojiya, sarvvaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ upayojiya, sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya ... jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

upari

upari

§ 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) upari iṣṭāhi mṛttikāya ca cchādayitavyā{ni}i

§ 19.3.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya vā upari karttavyā upalasya vā iṣṭakāya vā upari

§ 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā

§ 19.16.18A5. praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo tasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ dātavyaṃ

§ 19.22.18B2. ghaṭasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 19.22.18B2. cchidramallakasyôpari kuntako vā alābutumbuko vā thapayitavyo

§ 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā

§ 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 21.9.20B6. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ

§ 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā

§ 22.6.21A3. yadi <tā>va prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā

§ 23.4.1.21A7. maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā ... praveśiyāṇaṃ tato tahiṃ pratipādakānāṃ upari thapetavyo

§ 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ

§ 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ ... upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ, mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 25.15.23A2. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari jālavātāyane vā ...

§ 31.34.27A1. “āyuṣmaṃ, dvāraṃ bandhiya dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi ...” tena upari dvārakoṣṭhasya āsitavyaṃ

§ 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ (lies: tulikā?) vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti

§ 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... heṣṭhato viśālā hi upari saṃkṣiptā

§ 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni

§ 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni upari sthāpayituṃ

§ 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

uparitas

uparitas

§ 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ mahantaṃ bhavati, uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

uparimeṇa (BHS)

uparimeṇa (BHS)

“oben, herauf”

⇒ heṣṭhena

§ 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... uparimeṇa nivāsanasya snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

uparodha~

uparodha~

⇒ grāmoparodha~

比丘威儀法詞典

upala~

upala~

“Stein”

§ 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) iṣṭakāhi vā upalair vvā cchādayitavyā

§ 19.3.17B6. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) udakabhramaṇasya vā upari karttavyā upalasya vā iṣṭakāya vā upari

§ 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ

§ 42.7.36B2. bhūmi astaritavyā upalehi vā pakviṭṭikāya vā

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-√lakṣ

upa-√lakṣ

§ 40.12.33A4. pānīyaṃ vārentena upalakṣayitavyaṃ

§ 41.16.34B6. tena ... tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya sarvvam upalakṣitaṃ

§ 49.8.42B7. atha dāni nimantreti upalakṣitavyaṃ (“sich merken”) paścācchramaṇena

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-lipta~

upa-lipta~

⇒ upa-limpa-, liptopalipta~

§ 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, ... grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ (< dhotāṃ upaliptāṃ; Hs. thātôyaliptāṃ; ☞ § 39.21[Text], Anm. 1) kariya thapitavyāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-limpa-

upa-limpa-

⇒ upa-lipta~, liptopalipta~

§ 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upalepana~

upalepana~

⇒ lepanikā

§ 45.6.39B7. upalepanaṃ vā saṃmārjanaṃ vā <karttukāmā> bhava<n>ti

比丘威儀法詞典

upavāda~

upavicāra~

⇒ darśanopavicāra~

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-√viś

upa-√viś

“sich setzen, sich hinsetzen”

⇒ upa-viṣṭa~, upaviṣṭaka~, upaviṣṭikā~

§ 4.9.5A1. kadāci maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ. atha dāni pretakaraṇīye anuvāmaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 4.10.5A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ (Hs. °viśantaṃ)

§ 5.9.6B7. tato na kṣamati gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ

§ 6.9.7B7. tato nâpi kṣamati praviṣṭehi gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ

§ 5.9.6B7. anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 6.9.7B7. ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo

§ 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati

§ 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ

§ 18.23.16B2. tena ca parāṅmukhena u<pa>viśitavyaṃ antaraṃ dātavya

§ 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 18.24.16B2. samanantaraṃ upaviśitavyaṃ ca nivasanaṃ oguhitavyaṃ ca

§ 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 18.33.16B7. ekamante nivāsa<na>ṃ o<gu>hiya upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 18.47.17A6. sārthe niviṣṭasmiṃ samudācāro bhavati, ekānte upaviśiya karttavyaṃ

§ 19.10.18A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena upaveṣṭuṃ (Hs. °ṣṭaṃ)

§ 19.10.18A3. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena ekānte dantakāṣṭhaṃ sthāpayitvā upaveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 19.13.18A4. atha khalu ekatam’ aṃte upaviśiya praśvāso karttavyo

§ 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiyāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 26.4.23A7. mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti

§ 29.5.24B2. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa prahāṇe upaveṣṭuṃ

§ 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.5.29A5, § 36.5.29B4)

§ 39.16.31B4. svakasvakehi āsanehi (Loc. pl.) upaviśitavyaṃ (= § 39.28.32A6)

§ 41.26.35B3. pādadhovanikā bhavati ... yaṃ kālaṃ tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 41.26.35B3. evaṃ pi upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ ... upaviśituṃ

§ 41.30.35B6. ekāṃsīkṛtena upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti (Hs. °viṃśati)

§ 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo bhittīyo ghasaṃtā upaviśaṃti (Hs. °viṃśati)

§ 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ ... , na kṣamati tahiṃ upaviśituṃ

§ 48.6.41B1. (e)ka saṃkacchikāṃ (Hs. saṃkalikāṃ) prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 50.9.43B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgato bhavati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuṃjitavyaṃ

§ 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ

§ 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ ... utthiyāṇaṃ bhūyo upaviśati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati.”

§ 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti (Hs. °viṃśati) ukkhalantā prakkhalantā

§ 57.1.47B1. te dāni ... prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ ...

§ 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ

§ 57.4.47B3. praviśitvā vṛddhānte añjaliṃ kṛtvā yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-viṣṭa~

upa-śuṣka~#

“ausgetrocknet, trocken”

⇒ śuṣka~

§ 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ

§ 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati

比丘威儀法詞典

upasaṃhāra~

upasaṃhāra~

⇒ hitopasaṃhāra~

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-saṃ-√kram

upa-saṃ-√kram

☞ § 34.4(Text), Anm. 2 (über die Konstruktion des Verbums mit Akkusativ und Lokativ)

⇒ alliya-, alliyya-, allīya-, ā-llīya-

§ 4.8.4B7. amukaṃ kulaṃ upasaṃkramiṣyatha

§ 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi

§ 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram-iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?”

§ 34.3.28B3. kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya upasaṃkram-ituṃ

§ 35.3.29A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya brāhmaṇaparṣām upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 37.3.30A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gatāgatasya tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantene upānahāhi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya-parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ (☞ § 34.4[Text], Anm. 2)

§ 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkramitavyaṃ (☞ § 34.4[Text], Anm. 2)

§ 34.5.28B4. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4)

§ 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā

§ 39.2.30B7. te dāni grāmāntikā deśakālasmin kulāni upasaṃkramanti

§ 34.8.28B6. evaṃ kṣatriyaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 35.3.29A2. evaṃ brāhmaṇaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 36.3.29B2. evaṃ gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 37.3.30A2. evaṃ tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= § 37.7.30A5, Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 38.10.30B4. evaṃ āryaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi (Opt. 2. sg.)

§ 49.1.41B7. te dāni mahāntāni kulāny upasaṃkramantiusw.

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-saṃ-pāde- (BHS, Pā)

*upa-saṃpādentaka~#

“ordinierend”;

vgl. BHSG § 22.29

§ 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakena͡iva (Hs. °pādetuken°) ubhayato vinayo grāhayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

upaskara~

upaskara~

§ 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upastambha~

upastambha~

§ 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti, teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ, yathā na vihanyeṃsu

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-sthapaya- (BHS)

upa-sthapaya- (BHS)

⇒ upa-sthāpaya-, upa-sthāpe-, upa-thapaya-, √sthā

(1) “aufwecken”#

§ 53.8.45A7. atha khalu so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti

(2) “aufstehen”# (nicht-kausativ)

§ 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

upasthala-tarikā~#

upasthala-tarikā~#

“(Rauch)abzug”;

< upa (“zu, nach”) + sthala (“Erdboden”) + tarikā (“Boot”)?

☞ § 42.8, Anm. 7

§ 42.8.36B3. bhūmito arddhahasta upasthalatarikā karttavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

upasthāna-śālā~ (BHS)

upahasta~

“griffbereit”#

⇒ an-upahasta~

§ 45.4.39B6. prakṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 45.5.39B7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 45.7.40A2. rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastī-karttavyaṃ

§ 46.4.40A6. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 46.5.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastī-karttavyaṃ

§ 46.6.40B2. prakṛty’ eva tāva upahastī-karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upāṃsula~

upāṃsula~

⇒ uppaṃsula~

比丘威儀法詞典

upāṃsulaka~

upādhyāya~

§ 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5)

§ 7.3.8B1. tena hi evaṃ upādhyāyena śrāddhavihāresmiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakena͡iva ...

§ 7.7.8B4. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati ...

§ 7.8.8B5. evam upādhyāyena śraddhevihārismiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10A7)

§ 8.3.8B7. evaṃ sārddhevihāriṇā upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 8.14.9B4. evaṃ śraddhevihāriṇā upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1)

§ 25.13.22B7~23A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyasya vâcāryasya vā pātram allīpayati, nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ

§ 28.5.24A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā sārddhaṃ caṃkramati, ...

§ 28.5.24A3. <na kṣamati> upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya atirekaṃ caṃkramituṃ

§ 33.7.28A2. vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā ...” tti

§ 33.16.28A6~7. atha dāni koci pṛcchati “ko te upādhyāyo?” “ko te ācāryo?” vā, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “asuko ācāryo. asuko upādhyāyo.” atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi. asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo.”

§ 38.2.30A5. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo

§ 38.3.30A6. upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā jānitavyaṃ

§ 42.16.37A1. upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā praviṣṭako bhavati

§ 42.16.37A1. snāyāmi ācārya, snāyāmi upādhyāya

§ 44.5.39A2. upādhyāyasya <vā> ācāryasya vā cīvaraṃ ...

§ 44.5.39A3. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya <vā> cīvarehi ...

§ 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni

§ 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni upari sthāpayituṃ

§ 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā <cīvarāṇi> heṣṭe sthapayitavyāni

§ 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati

§ 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo (Voc. sg.) vā ācāryo vā vāma-hastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti

§ 49.8.42B7. amukena upādhyāyo (Voc. sg.?) nimantrito

§ 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ

§ 52.4.44B3. yadi tāva labdhaṃ bhavati, upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā saṃgraho karttavyo

§ 57.10.47B6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato sa-upānahena niṣīdituṃ

§ 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā āmantrayitvā gantuṃ

§ 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

upādhyāyācārya~ (°āya-āc°) (SWTF)

upānah~

⇒ upānahā~, upānahikā~, cchatropānahā~, sopānaha~

§ 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara-bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ...

§ 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito

比丘威儀法詞典

*upānaha-puṭa~#

*upānaha-puṭa~#

wörtl. “Falte der Sandale”?Es kann sich um zwei v-förmig zusammengelegte Sandalen handeln oder um eine Sandale, deren Sohle zusammengebogen ist

§ 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe (Hs. opā°) kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

p#.252

Nominals

p#.252

-yāḥ ......... Table#6, f. [33 nadī] Gen sg

-yāḥ ......... Table#6, f. [35 mati] Abl sg

-yāḥ ......... Table#6, f. [35 mati] Gen sg

比丘威儀法詞典

uśśaṃkiya-pariśaṅkiya~#

uṣṭra~

“Kamel”

§ 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā garddabhā vā cchagalakā vā evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti (≒ § 19.2.17B4)

§ 18.29.16B4. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā garddabhena vā ūrūyo ’hayaṃtena gacchituṃ

§ 18.33.16B6. na kṣamati <yathā> uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo ohayantena gantuṃ

§ 19.13.18A3. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā gardabhena vā ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ (≒ § 19.31.18B5)

比丘威儀法詞典

uṣṭra-paryaṅka~#

uṣṭra-paryaṅka~#

“das Knien wie ein Kamel”

☞ § 29.1, Anm. 1

⇒ paryaṅka~

§ 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahanti

§ 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha?

§ 29.2.24A7. duṣkṛtaṃ ... evaṃ ca yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha

§ 29.3.24A7. tena hi <na> kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdituṃ

§ 29.3.24B1. na kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

u-ṣṭhapaya-#

u-ṣṭhapaya-#

“aufstellen, hinstellen”;

< Skt. ud + sthāpayati > Pā. uṭṭhapeti, Pkt. uṭṭhavei

⇒ ut-thapaya-, ut-thape-, ut-thāpaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, thapaya-, thape-, sthapaya-, √sthā usw.

§ 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ udakad<ak>āna<ka>ṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā

比丘威儀法詞典

uṣṇa-santāpa~#

uṣṇa-santāpa~#

“starke Hitze”

☞ § 5.8, Anm. 3

§ 5.8.6B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, uṣṇasantāpena anukallatarakaṃ praviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kukkuṭa-pāśaka~#

kukkuṭa-pāśaka~#

eine Art Band (?); wörtl. “Hahnenschlinge”

§ 40.5.32B6. (Ein Wassergefäß) na dāni kukkuṭapāśakena bandhitvā sthāpetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ghṛta-pītaka~#

ghṛta-pītaka~#

“Schmelzbutter getrunken habend”

⇒ pīta~

§ 20.12.19B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati śirāviddhako vā virecanapītako vā ghṛtapītako vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

*ānukampikā~

*ānukampikā~

⇒ anukampikā~

比丘威儀法詞典

√āp

*ā-paṭita~

“gefallen”;

< Skt. ā-patita

☞ § 55.2, Anm. 3

⇒ up-paṭa-

§ 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ *āpaṭito (Hs. āpiṭito) yuga-mātraṃ uppaṭati

比丘威儀法詞典

āpatti~

āpatti~

⇒ srotāpatti-phala~

比丘威儀法詞典

āpatti-kauśalya~ (SWTF)

āpatti-kauśalya~ (SWTF)

“die Fähigkeit, mit Vergehen umzugehen”

☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1

§ 7.6.8B3. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-√pad

ā-pīḍaya-

“einschlagen”

⇒ √pīḍ

§ 22.2.21A1. cakkalī ... osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān ā{ṃ}pīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-puṇo-#

ā-puṇo-#

“bekommen, nehmen”;

< Skt. ā-pnoti; vgl. BHSG, S. 205a, s.v. āp (1) -āpuna-ti

§ 55.6.46B7. tenâpi dāni dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya ’puṇoti, niṣīditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-√pṛcch

ā-√pṛcch

§ 8.11.9A7. divāvihāraṃ gantukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitvā gantavyaṃ (Hs. āpṛcchi āgan°)

§ 8.11.9A7. yadi dāni tahiṃ kenaci saha svādhyāyatukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ (= § 8.13.9B3)

§ 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.”

§ 8.13.9B3. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ

§ 42.16.37A1. āpṛcchitvā karttavyaṃ

§ 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-pṛcchanikā~#

ā-pṛcchanikā~#

“Bitte um Erlaubnis”;

vgl. CPD, s.v. āpucchana(“[the act of] asking permission, leave-taking”); Skt. āpṛcchā, āpracchana

☞ § 8.13, Anm. 5

§ 8.13.9B3. yāvan na utthāpīyati, sā evam e<va> āpṛcchanikā. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ārogyāpaya- (BHS)

ārdra-pāda~

“nasser Fuß”

⇒ ārdra-pādaka~

§ 41.2.33B5. ārdrapādāṃ upānahāsu prakṣipiya

§ 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena (für ārdrapādehi [Instr. pl.] oder ārdrapādān) praveśayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ārdra-pādaka~#

ārdra-pādaka~#

“nasser Fuß”

⇒ ārdra-pāda~

§ 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ (Acc. pl. masc.) upānahāhi (Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya

比丘威儀法詞典

ārya-parṣā~#

ārya-miśra~

“Ehrenwerte Herren!”

§ 3.1.3A7. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye nâgacchanti

§ 5.1.6A5. gacchāma ... āryamiśrāṇāñ ca pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7)

§ 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati, praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ

§ 6.1.7A5. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye āgacchanti (≒ § 6.3.7A7)

§ 42.21.37A6. praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

ālāpa~

ā-liha-#

“berühren, streifen”

§ 40.11.33A4. na dāni ... keśā vā ālihitum vā niḍālam vā

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-lupya-

ā-lupya-

“angenagt werden”

§ 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā ... nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

īpsita~

īpsita~

⇒ ipsitānna~

比丘威儀法詞典

īryāpatha~ (BHS, SWTF)

īryāpatha~ (BHS, SWTF)

“Körperhaltung”

⇒ iryāpatha~, an-īryāpatha-sampanna~

§ 41.6.34A2. sthaviro dāni grāmāraṇyasamena īryāpathena samanvāgato

比丘威儀法詞典

u-kṣipta~#

u-kṣipta~#

“weggebracht”

⇒ ut-kṣipta~

比丘威儀法詞典

ukṣipta-rathyā~#

u-grāya-#

“rülpsen”;

vgl. ud-2√gr̥̄ (“ausspeien”), upa-2√gr̥̄ (“einschlucken” [PW])

☞ § 4.13, Anm. 4

⇒ upa-grāya

§ 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti

妙法蓮華經詞典

ps-L

比丘威儀法詞典

catuhi (Loc. pl. von catur)

Candrabhāgā~#

Name eines Flusses

☞ § 26.8, Anm. 1

§ 26.8.23B2. “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ” yāva “Mahī Candrabhāgā ayaṃ.”

比丘威儀法詞典

capala~

capala~

⇒ a-capala~

比丘威儀法詞典

capeṭikā~ (Skt)

capeṭikā~ (Skt)

“Schlag mit der Hand”

§ 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti

§ 53.11.45B1. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ

§ 53.15.45B4. na dāni kṣamati mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā capeṭikāya vā nirvvāpayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

campaka-gulikā~#

campaka-gulikā~#

“Strauß von Campaka-Blumen”

§ 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

Campā~

Campā~

§ 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Campāyāṃ Gaṃgāpānīya

比丘威儀法詞典

*uccāra-prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~#

*uccāra-prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~#

“Exkremente, Urin, Schleim und Rotz”

⇒ kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~

§ 18.18.16A6. yathā uccāraprasrāvakheṭasiṃghāṇakaṃ (Hs. °praśrāva°) sarvvaṃ tahiṃ nigacche

比丘威儀法詞典

ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~#

ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~#

“liegengeblieben und verstreut”

⇒ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇa~, prakīrṇṇakaṃ, prakīrṇṇakasya

§ 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ utthitakaṃ

§ 11.3.10B4. kasyêmaṃ bhikṣavo śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ ... ātape dinnaṃ?

§ 11.5.10B6. yadi tāva ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ bhavati, sāharitvā ekānte sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ (Hs. °ṇṇe) omayilemayilaṃ ...

§ 12.3.11B1. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 15.3.14A1. śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati?

§ 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

du-tthapita~#

du-tthapita~#

“schlecht hingestellt”;

< dus +sthā̆pita

☞ § 12.6, Anm. 2

⇒ du-tthāpitaka~, du-tthita~, du-tthitaka~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, thapaya-, sthapaya-, sthape-, √sthā usw.

§ 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthapitā bhavanti, sutthapitā karttavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

du-tthāpitaka~#

du-tthāpitaka~#

“schlecht hingestellt”;

< dus +sthā̆pita + Suffix ka

⇒ du-tthapita~, du-tthita~, du-tthitaka~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~

§ 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthāpitakā (Hs. utthāpitakā) bhavanti, susthitā karttavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

du-puṭa~#

du-puṭa~#

⇒ puṭa~

比丘威儀法詞典

durggandha-prahāṇārthaṃ# (°hāṇa-arth°)

durggandha-prahāṇārthaṃ# (°hāṇa-arth°)

“um üblen Geruch zu beseitigen”

§ 20.17.20A3. nâpi kṣamati vibhūṣaṇābhiprāyeṇa dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ. atha khalu durggandhaprahāṇārthaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-ā-stara- (Skt [Lex.])

praty-ut-thā-

“aufstehen”

§ 54.12.46A7. tena dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya gṛhītavyaṃ

§ 55.6.46B7. tenâpi dāni dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya ’puṇoti, niṣīditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-ud-gaccha-

praty-ud-gaccha-

“entgegengehen”

§ 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ

§ 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-upa-√sthā

praty-upa-√sthā

“herantreten, bevorstehen”

§ 54.9.46A5. yadi dakṣiṇato sthito bhavati, vāmajānukena tena cchatti pratyupasthitavyaṃ ghaṭ<ṭ>itavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-upa-sthāpayitavya~

praty-upa-sthāpayitavya~

“zu erweisen”

⇒ praty-upa-sthita~

§ 42.5.36B1. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi ca͡iva raho ca

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-upa-sthita~ (BHS)

praty-upa-sthita~ (BHS)

“aufwartend”

⇒ praty-upa-sthāpayitavya~

§ 36.6.29B6. bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo, yaṃ vo pratyupasthitā cīvarapiṇḍapātaśeyyāsanaglānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārehi

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-o-tāpe-#

praty-o-tāpe-#

“in die Sonne stellen”;

vgl. CPD, s.v. otāpeti (< ut + √tap, “to warm up; to dry”)

☞ § 13.14, Anm. 2

§ 13.14.12B6. pañcāhe pañcāhe śayyāsanaṃ pratyotāpetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prathamaṃ

prathamaṃ

“erst”

§ 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya

§ 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa

§ 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiyakāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā

§ 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya

§ 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā

§ 25.14.23A1~2. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ ... śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ ... pratisāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano

§ 53.5.45A4. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīrakuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo

§ 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopānamaggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo

§ 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

prathamaka~ (BHS)

prathamaka~ (BHS)

“erster”

§ 5.13.7A3. yathā prathamake śikṣāpade evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prathamam

pradakṣiṇī-kare-#

< Skt. pradakṣiṇī-√kṛ

⇒ kare-, √kṛ usw.

§ 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.20.26A4. saṃghārāmaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi āgantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-darśita~

pra-darśita~

§ 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni

比丘威儀法詞典

pradīpa~

pradīpa~

“Lampe”

⇒ dīpa~, dīpaka~, dīpikā~ (1)

§ 15.6.14A2. pradīpo jvālayitavyo tṛṇolkā vā kaṇḍolkā vā prajvālayitavyā

§ 53.3.45A3. evaṃ dīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ pradīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ

Uddāna (VII).50B1. <evam> pradīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ

Antaroddāna 50B2. āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

praduṣṭa-citta~#

praduṣṭa-citta~#

“böse Absicht habend”;

vgl. Pā. paduṭṭha-citta~

⇒ duṣṭa-citta~, pra-dūṣaya-

§ 41.5.34A2. so dāni praduṣṭacitto sthavirasya pṛṣṭhimena pṛṣṭhimaṃ anubaddho

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-dūṣaya- (BHS, SWTF) (zusammen mit cittaṃ)

pra-dūṣaya- (BHS, SWTF) (zusammen mit cittaṃ)

“Groll hegen”;

vgl. Pā. padūseti, padoseti

⇒ praduṣṭa-citta~, duṣṭa-citta~

§ 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ (Hs. °itaṃ). atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me karentî”ti

§ 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti

比丘威儀法詞典

pradeśa~

pradeśa~

⇒ *atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, *cchanna-pradeśa~, pṛthivī-pradeśa~, pradeśaka~

§ 1.6.1B5. yasmin pradeśe yaṃ divasaṃ saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ...

§ 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs)

§ 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ

§ 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ

§ 19.24.18B3. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 19.36.18B7. praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ

§ 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe sthātavyaṃ

§ 28.10.24A5. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe caṃkramituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe caṃkramitavyaṃ

§ 29.9.24B5~6. nâpi kṣamati ... atibhuṃḍe vā pradeśe niṣīdituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe niṣīditavyaṃ

§ 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ

§ 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upāsikā~ (BHS, Pā)

upāsikā~ (BHS, Pā)

“Laienanhängerin”

⇒ upāsakā~

§ 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko

§ 6.5.7B2. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsaka upāsikā gṛhastho pravrajito

§ 39.2.31A1. upāsike (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) detha bhaktāni

比丘威儀法詞典

upe- (upa-√i)

upe- (upa-√i)

§ 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śaraṇaṃ upetu (vs) (= § 6.13.8A3)

比丘威儀法詞典

upeḍanaka~

up-pīḍaya-#

“bedrängen; drücken”;

< Skt. ut-pīḍayati (“hinaufdrücken, hinaufdrängen”);

vgl. Pā. uppīḷeti

⇒ up-pīḍita~, ut-pīḍita-, up-pīlita~

§ 19.9.18A2. atha dāni so bhikṣuḥ uppīḍiyate (Hs. °yatī) yeva acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ

§ 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

up-pīḍita~#

up-pīḍita~#

“bedrängt”;

< Skt. utpīḍita; vgl. Pā. uppīḷita

⇒ up-pīḍaya-, ut-pīḍita-, up-pīlita~

§ 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito (Hs. uddīpito) nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati

§ 18.22.16B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena sahasā uppīḍito (Hs. °uppaḍi) bhavati, ...

§ 18.23.16B2. atha dāni uppīḍito bhavati, acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ

§ 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ...

§ 19.13.18A3. atha dāni praśvāsena uppīḍito bhavati, na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa ...

比丘威儀法詞典

up-pīlita~#

ubha~

§ 4.17.5B5. ubhau śraddhāya sampannā ubhau śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs)

§ 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs)

§ 29.6.24B4. ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ

§ 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi (Hs. °ohi) praśvāso karttavyo

§ 36.6.29B5. sāgārā cânagārā ca ubhe (BHSG § 19.7; Geiger § 114.2) anyonyaniśritā (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

ul-lapa-# (2)

uv-vaṭṭaya-#

“reiben”;

vgl. Pā. ubbaṭṭeti, BHS. udvartayati, Pkt. uvvaṭṭe-

☞ § 60.4, Anm. 2

§ 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā sukhākaṃ uvvaṭṭayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccaṭṭ°)

比丘威儀法詞典

niṣ-prāṇaka~ (BHS)

*nihīnaka~

“Abstand (hinter jemandem) haltend”;

vgl. Skt. nihīna (“niedrigen Standes”)

☞ § 28.5, Anm. 1

⇒ o-hayitvā

§ 28.5.24A4. atha khalu dve trayo vā padāni <ni>hīnakena (Hs. hin°) caṃkramitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

p / gh

p / gh

⇒ gh / p

比丘威儀法詞典

p / j

p / j

⇒ j / p

比丘威儀法詞典

p / d

p / d

⇒ d / p

比丘威儀法詞典

p / dh

p / dh

⇒ dh / p

比丘威儀法詞典

p / ph:

p / ph:

§ 62.6.50A2. piccakam für phicca° (= § 62.8.50A4)

比丘威儀法詞典

p / b:

p / b:

§ 62.2.49B6. paddamuṣṭikāṃ für baddhamu°

比丘威儀法詞典

p / m:

p / m:

§ 4.18.5B7. vastumālānāṃ für vastupālānāṃ

§ 13.15.12B6. omasvediko für opa°

§ 61.1.49A2. paṭapaṭāva für maṭamaṭāya

比丘威儀法詞典

vindhāpaya-#

vindhāpaya-#

“durchbohren lassen, (Adern) öffnen lassen”

⇒ viddha~

§ 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati bāhuśirāṃ vâṅgulyaśirāṃ vā nilāṭiṃ vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

Vipaśyin~ (BHS, SWTF)

Vipaśyin~ (BHS, SWTF)

Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit

§ 4.15.5B1. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhi<ṃ> ca Viśvabhuṃ (vs) (≒ § 6.13.8A4)

比丘威儀法詞典

vi-pāṭita~

vi-pāṭita~

“zerrissen”

⇒ pāṭita-vipāṭita~, pāṭita~

§ 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... pāṭitaṃ vā vipāṭitaṃ bhavati, sīvitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

vipāṇḍara~

vipāṇḍara~

⇒ paṇḍara-vipāṇḍara~

比丘威儀法詞典

vipula~

vipula~

§ 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

vi-pra-kaṭa~#

vi-pra-kaṭa~#

“unterbrochen”;

vgl. Pā. vippakata, BHS. viprakṛta

☞ § 53.17, Anm. 1

§ 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu” tti

比丘威儀法詞典

vi-pra-labdha~

vi-pra-labdha~

“getäuscht”

§ 4.7.4B5. jānitavyaṃ “vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho” ti (= § 5.7.6B4, § 6.7.7B4)

§ 4.7.4B6. āyuṣman vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho (≒ § 5.7.6B5)

§ 49.1.42A4. evaṃ ca evaṃ câsmi vipralabdho (= § 49.2.42A5)

比丘威儀法詞典

pāriveṇika~#

pāriveṇika~#

“in Zellen wohnende Mönche betreffend”;

vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 68, 2B2.5. pāriveṇikā; Roth 1968: 340f.

⇒ pariveṇika~

§ 42.13.36B6. jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye

比丘威儀法詞典

pāre-

pāla~

⇒ rakṣa-pāla~

比丘威儀法詞典

pālaka~

pālaka~

⇒ go-pālaka~, paśu-pālaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

pālaya-

pālaya-

⇒ anu-pāle-, prati-pālaya-, prati-pāle-

§ 4.15.5B2. tā naṃ rakṣaṃtu tā ca naṃ pālayantu (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pāśa~

pāśa~

⇒ gaṇṭhi-pāśa~

比丘威儀法詞典

pāśaka~

pāśaka~

⇒ kukkuṭa-pāśaka~, gaṇṭhi-pāśaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṣāṇa~

pi (BHS, Pā)

⇒ pi nāma, pi ... pi, api, evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kṛtvā, evaṃ pi kariya, taṃ pi

§ 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu ...

§ 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ

§ 3.1.3A7. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye nâgacchanti (≒ § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7)

§ 4.1.4A6. saṃghasthaviro pi nâgacchati

§ 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs)

§ 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu vratānugā (vs)

§ 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs)

§ 5.3.6A7. saṃghasthaviro pi odhyāyati “asmākaṃ bhagavān ...”

§ 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati ... kārāpayituṃ

§ 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati ...

§ 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām ... vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ

§ 21.5.20B2. atha dāni aparo pi koci sīvayi<tu>kāmo bhavati, ... (≒ § 21.6.20B4)

§ 23.5.21B2. madhyamake pi eṣo eva paryāyo ananyo adhikṛto

§ 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ

§ 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti ...

§ 34.1.28B1. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiya madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.28B7, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7)

§ 39.1.30B7. āhatā pi ’yaṃ gaṇḍī, bhukta<ṃ> pi (oder lies: “bhukt’ api”) amhehi

§ 39.9.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocetha

§ 39.9.31A6. tehi pi dāni āraṇyakehi

§ 39.16.31B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi yatra p’ ullaggikāye āsituṃ

§ 39.9.31A6. āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocitavyaṃ

§ 39.10.31A7. āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantrehi

§ 39.10.31A7. vayaṃ pi na praticchāma

§ 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati”

§ 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābhagrāh<ak>o?” yadi tāvaj jalpanti “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha”

§ 39.26.32A4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, ...

§ 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ

§ 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni ... dātavyaṃ

§ 41.1.33B3. udake pi khalu mātrā

§ 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā

§ 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī

§ 41.14.34B4. ahaṃ pi na jānāmi

§ 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs)

§ 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ udaka-d<ak>āna<ka>ṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā

§ 41.26.35B3. evaṃ pi upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 42.3.36A5. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti

§ 42.3.36A6. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā (= § 42.4.36A7)

§ 42.4.36A7. bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti

§ 47.1.40B4. ime pi (“jedoch”) na jānanti ... (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4)

§ 48.6.41B1. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato ...

§ 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi (“aber”) deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati

§ 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ ... āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati”

§ 50.2.43A3. ayuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema

§ 52.1.44B1. ime pi (“aber”) bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti

§ 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā. te<na> pi (“aber”) dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo

§ 55.6.46B7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracālayati, na kṣamati so pi adhyupekṣituṃ

§ 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti (≒ § 57.3.47B2)

§ 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ

§ 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti usw.

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

paśu

paśu

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

pitṛ | pitr

pitṛ

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

phala

phala

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

√svap (2)

√svap (2)

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

√kṣip (6/4) | √ksip (6/4)

√kṣip (6/4)

Rod Bucknell: 《梵語手冊》語尾變化數位索引

√pū (9/1) | √pu (9/1)

√pū (9/1)

比丘威儀法詞典

pi nāma

pi nāma

§ 20.12.19B7. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi nāma khādantena na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃghavigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ;

vgl. § 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ut-√kṣip

ut-tatthapaya-#

“(den Fußboden) aufgraben”;

vgl. Skt. ut-tiṣṭhati, ut-thāpayati; Pā. uṭṭhapayati, °peti

☞ § 18.35, Anm. 4

⇒ ut-tatthaya-, ut-thapaya-, ut-thāpaya-, ut-thāpīya-

§ 18.35.16B7. yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, uttatthapitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

paudgalika-paudgalika~#

paudgalika-paudgalika~#

“persönlich”;

vgl. BHS, SWTF. paudgalika

§ 19.23.18B2. atha dāni saṃghe praśvāsaghaṭo na bhavati, paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

pauruṣa~

pauruṣa~

§ 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi (☞ § 1.5, Anm.3)?

§ 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi

比丘威儀法詞典

pauruṣeya~

pauruṣeya~

⇒ prabhūta-dāsī-dāsa-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~

比丘威儀法詞典

pt / ṣṭ:

pt / ṣṭ:

§ 49.7.42B6. -paryeptiṃ für -paryeṣṭiṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-cchanna~

prati-cchanna~

⇒ prati-cchādaya-

§ 42.22.37A7. udakasya (lies: uda<kena> kakṣa?) praticchannaṃ bhavati

§ 42.22.37B1. yathā nābhi praticchannā bhaveya

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-sādaya-

prasevikā~#

“Beutel (für die Almosenschale)”;

vgl. Skt. prasevaka

⇒ pātra-prasevikā~

§ 25.15.23A2. prasevikā (Hs. °vesikā) karttavyā dupuṭā tṛpuṭā. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena ... utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

madana-phala~

madana-phala~

“Frucht von Vanguiera spinosa” oder im allgemeinen “berauschende Frucht”

☞ § 62.4, Anm. 3

§ 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā

比丘威儀法詞典

akalpiya-karakī~#

akalpiya-karakī~#

“Krug für das Wasser, das für den Gebrauch durch Mönche nicht geeignet ist, d.h. Krug für ungefiltertes Wasser”

☞ § 18.7, Anm. 7

⇒ akalpiya-karkkarī~, kalpiya-karakī

§ 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi?

§ 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ

§ 40.8.33A1. tato pānīyāto kalpiyakarakī vā akalpiyakarakī vā ... pūrayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

akalpiya-karkkarī~#

a-kālī-bhūta~#

“außer der (Essens)Zeit geworden”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. a-kāla

§ 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati” yāva akālībhūtaṃ

道行般若經詞典

misp.

比丘威儀法詞典

tāla-pādukā~#

tāla-pādukā~#

“Schuh aus Palmenblättern”;

vgl. Pā. tāla-patta-pādukā

☞ § 28.1, Anm. 2

§ 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha-caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti

道行般若經詞典

ps-L

道行般若經詞典

ps-ZQ

比丘威儀法詞典

kṣudra-pāka~ (BHS[Mvu])

kṣudra-pāka~ (BHS[Mvu])

“überreif”

§ 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... kṣudrapākāni vā phalāni praticchituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

Gaṃgā-pānīya~#

Gaṃgā-pānīya~#

“Gangeswasser”

§ 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Campāyāṃ Gaṃgāpānīya (Nom. neut. sg.)

比丘威儀法詞典

anukampā~

anukampā~

§ 11.1.10B2. glānakānāñ ca bhikṣūṇāṃ anukampārthaṃ (= § 12.1.11A6)

比丘威儀法詞典

anukampikā~

anukampikā~

§ 4.18.5B7. mahābhiṣaṅkana ca anukampikā (lies: ānu° [m.c.] ?)(vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-kampita~

anukalya~

⇒ anukālya~

比丘威儀法詞典

gṛhapatika~ (BHS[Mvu, Śikṣ])

gṛhapatika~ (BHS[Mvu, Śikṣ])

“Hausherr”

§ 36.6.29B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.”

比丘威儀法詞典

*ud-dhāpaya-

*ud-dhāpaya-

“aufwirbeln”;

∈ *ud-dhāvaya-, Kausativ von Skt. ud-√dhū (“aufrütteln, aufschütteln”)

☞§ 23.4.4, Anm. 1

⇒ dhuna-, nir-ddhāpa-

§ 23.4.4.21B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ekenântena. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ, na paṃtholi<ṃ> uddhāpayantena (Hs. ḍaddhā°)

比丘威儀法詞典

*grāmoparodha~ (°ma-upa°)

*grāmoparodha~ (°ma-upa°)

“Gefahr im Dorf”;

vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 157.4A5.5. nagaroparodha (= ib. § 157.4A5.6, § 221.8B3.1)

§ 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti

比丘威儀法詞典

d / p:

d / p:

§ 8.5.9A2. nirmmāpayitavyaṃ für nirmmāda°

比丘威儀法詞典

evaṃ pi #

evaṃ pi #

“dennoch; immer noch”;

< Skt. evam api

⇒ evaṃ pi kariya, evaṃ pi kṛtvā, taṃ pi

§ 12.15.12A2. atha dāni evaṃ pi stokā bhavanti, ... (= § 12.16.12A3)

§ 12.16.12A4. atha dāni evaṃ pi alpāvakāśo bhavati, ...

§ 18.41.17A3. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, ... (= § 18.44.17A5, § 24.6.22A3, § 25.10. 22B6, § 31.31.26B6)

§ 18.43.17A4. evaṃ pi na bhavati, śūnyagharaṃ vā jambālam vā bhavati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-padam

anu-parinda- (BHS)

“anvertrauen”;

vgl. BHSG, S. 220. parinda-ti, parīnda-ti; BHSD, s.v. anu-parindāmi

☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3

⇒ paritta~, parītta~, parinda-

§ 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparindi-tavyo ... “eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu!” evaṃ anuparindiyāṇa gantavyaṃ

§ 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ “dīrghāyu, eṣo vihārako tumhāṇaṃ anuparindito bhavatu. ...” evaṃ parindiya gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-pari-vartta-

anu-pari-vartta-

“sich umdrehen”

§ 28.8.24A4~5. anuparivarttantena (Hs. anuvari°) tadā na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ. atha khalu abhidakṣiṇaṃ agrato karentena anuparivarttitavyaṃ

§ 49.1.42A2. so dāni tato yeva anuparivarttiya mahātmehi kulehi ipsitânnāni bhukt<v>ā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-pari-vāraya- (BHS)

anu-pari-vāraya- (BHS)

“einschließen”

§ 29.3.24B1. ekaṃ nāgaṃ dve nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, dve nāgā catvāri nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, catvāri aṣṭa, aṣṭa ṣoḍaśa, ṣoḍaśa <dvātriṃśad>, dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anupa<ri>vārya niṣīdanti

比丘威儀法詞典

evaṃ pi kariya #

evaṃ pi kariya #

“dennoch; immer noch”

☞ § 42.20, Anm. 6

⇒ evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kṛtvā

§ 42.28.37B5. evaṃ pi kariya tailamātrā janitavyā

§ 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati, evaṃ pi kariya gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

evaṃ pi kṛtvā #

evaṃ pi kṛtvā #

“dennoch; immer noch”

☞ § 42.20, Anm. 6

⇒ evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kariya

§ 42.20.37A5. evaṃ pi kṛtvā mātrāye upanetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A6)

比丘威儀法詞典

evaṃ-rūpa~

evaṃ-rūpa~

§ 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma yūyaṃ idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha

比丘威儀法詞典

an-upalipta~ (BHS, SWTF)

an-upalipta~ (BHS, SWTF)

⇒ an-upaliptaka~, upa-limpa-, su-lipta~

(1) “nicht befleckt, unberührt”

§ 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena

(2) “nicht (mit Tünche?) bestrichen”#(?)

☞ § 43.1, Anm. 2

§ 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā adhotakā anupaliptā nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

an-upaliptaka~#

an-upaliptaka~#

“nicht (mit Tünche?) bestrichen” (?)

☞ § 43.1, Anm. 2

⇒ an-upalipta~, upa-limpa-, su-lipta~

§ 43.15.38B3. upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃgarañjitaṃ vā adhotakam vā anupaliptakam vā dayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

an-upahasta~#

an-upahasta~#

“nicht griffbereit”

⇒ upahasta~

§ 45.4.39B5. grāmapraveśanikaṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kṛtvā ...

§ 45.5.39B6. vihāracaraṇa<ka>ṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kariyāṇaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-pāle- (Pā)

anu-pāle- (Pā)

“sich kümmern”;

< Skt. anu-pālayati

⇒ pālaya-, prati-pālaya-, prati-pāle-

§ 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... atha khalu anupāletavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

anupūrvveṇa

anupūrvveṇa

“allmählich”

§ 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-pra-viṣṭa~

anu-pra-viṣṭa~

§ 44.1.38B7. sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ

§ 44.6.39A4. tatra͡iva sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-pra-√śaṃs#

anu-pra-√śaṃs#

“(ebenso) preisen”

⇒ pra-√śaṃs

§ 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-prāpaya-#

anu-prāpaya-#

“erreichen lassen, führen”;

Kaus. von Skt. anu-pra-√āp

§ 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī-niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

anu-modāpaya-#

anu-modāpaya-#

“freudig annehmen”

(Kausativ auf -āpayati mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG§§ 38.58f.);

vgl. SWTF, s.v. anu-mud-; CPD, s.v. anu-modati

§ 1.11.2A3. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyaṃ

§ 2.9.3A2. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmo anumodāpayitavyo

§ 3.10.4A2. deyadharmma pratiṣṭhāpayitavyo deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

*apakkāra~#

*apakkāra~#

“Speisereste”;

vgl. Pā. avakkāra(“leavings from a meal” [CPD]), Skt. apaskara (“Exkrement”), avaskara (“Exkrement”)

☞ § 8.8, Anm. 5

§ 8.8.9A5. bhuktāvisya pātraṃ apakarṣitavyaṃ apakkā<raṃ> ca

比丘威儀法詞典

apakva~

apakva~

“luftgetrockneter Ziegel, ungebrannter Ziegel, Lehmziegel”#?

⇒ apakka~, apakka-pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~

比丘威儀法詞典

apakva-cchadana~

apakva-cchadana~

“Decke bzw. Dach aus Lehmziegeln”

⇒ apakka-cchadana~

比丘威儀法詞典

apakva-pāṃsuka~

apakva-pāṃsuka~

⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~

比丘威儀法詞典

apāvuraṇa~#

apāvuraṇa~#

“(Tür-)Öffner”;

vgl. Pā. apāpuraṇa, avāpuraṇa; BHS. apāvaraṇī; v. Hinüber 1992: 14~19

☞ § 31.3, Anm. 2

⇒ apāvuraṇi~, apā-vura-, apa-dura-, *apa-duvara-

§ 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi pāḍiyakkapāḍiyak{a}kāni apāvuraṇāni upasthāpayitavyāni

§ 31.20.26A3. vihāro ... ghaṭṭitako bhavati, apāvuraṇena apaduriyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

apāvuraṇi~#

apāvuraṇi~#

“(Tür-)Öffner”;

vgl. Pā. apāpuraṇa, avāpuraṇa; BHS.apāvaraṇī; v. Hinüber 1992: 14~19

☞ § 31.3, Anm. 2

⇒ apāvuraṇa~, apā-vura-, apa-dura-, *apa-duvara-

§ 31.3.25B3. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi na bhavati, sarvve vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi bhavati, sarvveṣām anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

apāśraya~

apāśraya~

⇒ sāpāśraya~

比丘威儀法詞典

apā-śraya-

apā-śraya-

“sich anlehnen”

§ 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}-vipāṇḍaraṃ apāśrayituṃ

§ 48.7.41B2. bhaginī prajñapehi kuḍḍasmiṃ yahiṃ apāśrayitavyaṃ

§ 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā ... śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ

§ 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

a-prayata~

a-prayata~

“unrein”

§ 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā vighaso vā saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ

§ 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṣālitvā nirmmādayitvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

a-prasanna~

a-bahir-ggata~#

“nicht nach außen gerichtet”

§ 41.4.34A1. antarggatehi indriyehi abahirggatena mānasena (Hs. man°)

比丘威儀法詞典

abhi-pra-moda-

abhi-pra-moda-

“freudig zustimmen”

§ 1.13.2A7. yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ, abhipramodantu āyuṣmanto

§ 2.11.3A5. tato yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhipramodayaṃtu āyuṣmanto abhipra-modayantu āyuṣmanto apramādena saṃpādayitavyaṃ (≒ § 3.12.4A4)

比丘威儀法詞典

abhi-pra-sanna~ (BHS, SWTF)

abhi-pra-sanna~ (BHS, SWTF)

“zugeneigt, ergeben”

§ 4.15.5B2. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs)

§ 6.13.8A4. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi ye devatā santi abhiprasannāḥ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

abhiprāya~

abhiprāya~

⇒ upārambhaṇābhiprāya~, auddhatyābhi°, viheṭhanābhi°, vibhūṣaṇābhi°

比丘威儀法詞典

kaṇḍikā-pūraka~#

kaṇḍikā-pūraka~#

“Mörser und Stößel” (?)

☞ § 51.7, Anm. 3

⇒ śilā-pūrakā̆~

§ 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti

比丘威儀法詞典

kapittha~

kabhallikā~

⇒ kabhallakā~

比丘威儀法詞典

√kamp

√kamp

⇒ devānukampita~

比丘威儀法詞典

*pantholi~?

para~

§ 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena durabhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti

§ 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

alpa-nirghoṣa~#

alpa-nirghoṣa~#

“wenig Lärm machend, ruhig”;

vgl. Pā. appa-nigghosa

§ 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi jentāke snāyitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

alpa-śabda~ (SJW 137a; SWTF I 156, 552; Mbh. 6.92.58)

alpa-śabda~ (SJW 137a; SWTF I 156, 552; Mbh. 6.92.58)

“leise”;

vgl. Pā. appa-sadda

§ 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi jentāke snāyitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

alpāvakāśa~# (alpa-ava°)

alliya-#

“nahekommen, sich nähern, zukommen”;

Pkt. alliyai, s. dazu Oberlies 1993: 24

⇒ alliyya-, allīya-, ā-llīya-, praty-allīya-, praty-ā-līya-, allīpaya-, √lī, upa-saṃ-√kram

§ 34.3.28B3. atha khalu ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā (Hs. allipi°)

比丘威儀法詞典

para-keraka~ (BHS)

para-keraka~ (BHS)

“eines anderen”;

< para-*kāryaka; vgl. BHSD, s.v. -keraka (“belonging to”)

☞ § 18.53, Anm. 5

§ 18.53.17B3. atha dāni parakerako uccāro bhavati, pratigrahāpayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpiya-kuṭikā~#

kalpiya-kuṭikā~#

“die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus”

☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3

⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭī~, sāṃghika-kalpiyakuṭī~

§ 3.5.3B2. vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā dvārakoṣṭhake vā prāsāde vā kalpiyakuṭikāyāṃ vā bandhitavyaṃ ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kāya-paricaryā~ (SWTF, SJW)

kāya-paricaryā~ (SWTF, SJW)

“Bedienung mit dem Körper” oder “Bedienung am Körper”?;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. paricaryā

☞ § 42.29, Anm. 1

§ 10.5.10A6. navak<ehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāy>aparicaryā karttavyā

§ 42.29.37B5. navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāyaparicaryā karttavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

ācāra-guṇa-sampanna~ (Pā)

ācāra-guṇa-sampanna~ (Pā)

“vollkommen im Besitz (tadellosen) Benehmens und von Tugend”

§ 41.19.35A2. ācāraguṇasampannāḥ ye bhavanti tu mānavāḥ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

dāna-pati~

dāna-pattī~#

“Gabenherrin”;

vgl. Pkt. pattī < Skt. patnī

⇒ dānapati~

§ 33.11.28A5. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu-kāmo bhavati, ... “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā “vihārasvāmini” ti vā śabdāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

para-pratibaddha~ (SWTF)

para-pratibaddha~ (SWTF)

“von anderen abhängig”;

vgl. Pā. para-paṭibaddha

☞ § 62.4, Anm. 6

§ 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ...

比丘威儀法詞典

up / upp:

up / upp:

§ 17.12.15A6. upādakā für uppā°

§ 50.7.43B2. uppakkaṭo wohl für upakaṭṭho

§ 50.7.43B3. upakkhaṭo für upakaṭṭho

比丘威儀法詞典

upaṃsulaka~

upaṃsulaka~

⇒ uppaṃsulaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

upaka~

upaka~

⇒ nagara-kulopaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

paramaṃ

paramaṃ

“höchstens”

§ 25.11.22B7. atha khalu paramaṃ trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni. ekahastena dve gṛhṇitavyāḥ, apareṇa dāni ekaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paryanta~

paryādāna~ (BHS)

“Ende, Verschwinden”

☞ § 24.11, Anm. 2

§ 24.11.22A6. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

pary-āpta~

pary-āpta~

§ 12.14.12A2. tahi koci bhavati āṭakkarasiṃhanādiko “paryāpto. ... ko vihārako?” ti

§ 18.13.16A2. kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ (Hs. °āstaṃ) bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ipsitānna~# (ipsita-anna)

ipsitānna~# (ipsita-anna)

“erwünschte Speise”;

< Skt. īpsitā°

§ 49.1.42A2. so ... mahātmehi kulehi ipsitānnāni (Hs. °āti) bhukt<v>ā

§ 49.1.42A3. nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya

§ 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman, kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5)

比丘威儀法詞典

iryāpatha~ (BHS)

iryāpatha~ (BHS)

“Körperhaltung”;

vgl. Pā. iriyāpatha

⇒ īryāpatha~

§ 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti (Hs. paṭha°), nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti

§ 41.5.34A2. ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-kaṭṭha~ (Pā)

upa-kaṭṭha~ (Pā)

“(die Zeit) naht heran”;

< Skt. upa-kṛṣṭa; vgl. DP, s.v. upakaṭṭha (“drawing near [esp. of time]”).

§ 50.7.43B2. yadi upakaṭṭho (Hs. uppakkaṭo) kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ

§ 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho (Hs. upakkhaṭo) kālo antāntiko, na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upakaraṇa~

upaga~

⇒ puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~

比丘威儀法詞典

upagacchanikā-kāla~#

upagacchanikā-kāla~#

“die Zeit des Eintretens (in die Regenzeit)”;

vgl. Pā. vassaṃ upagacchati (“tritt in die Regenzeit ein”)

☞§ 12.1, Anm. 1

§ 12.1.11A4. te dāni bhikṣū upagacchanikākāle vihārān na pratisaṃskarenti

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-gata~

upa-gata~

⇒ upa-√gam, puṣpopagata~, varṣopagata~

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-√gam

upa-√gam

⇒ puṣpopagata~, varṣopagata~

§ 12.3.11B1. ye varṣāṃ upagacchiṣyanti, te pratisaṃskariṣyanti

§ 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā (< vāsa upa° < vāsaṃ upa°) bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

dvi-puṭa~ (BHS)

dvi-puṭa~ (BHS)

⇒ -puṭa~

比丘威儀法詞典

agra-piṇḍapāta~#

agra-piṇḍapāta~#

“die beste Almosenspeise”

§ 49.9.42B7. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi ...

比丘威儀法詞典

a-capala~

aciram

§ 41.12.34B1. tasya dāni eko putro acira<ṃ> jāto

比丘威儀法詞典

ati-gupta~

ati-gupta~

“allzu versteckt, verborgen”

⇒ ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna-pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~

§ 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

*atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~

*atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~

“völlig stiller Teil (des Hauses)”?;

vgl. Schmidt, Nachtr. s.v. atiniḥśabda(“very silent”)

☞ § 18.43, Anm. 2

⇒ ati-gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna-pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~

§ 18.43.17A5. na dāni tahiṃ atini<ḥ>śabdapradeśe (Hs. °praveśe) upaveṣṭavyaṃ ... cchanna<prākaṭe>pradeśe (Hs. °praveśe) upaveṣṭavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ati-prākaṭa~# (Hs. abhini°)

ati-prākaṭa~# (Hs. abhini°)

“allzu sichtbar, allzu öffentlich”

☞ § 19.21, Anm. 2

§ 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ

§ 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ

§ 28.10.24A5. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe caṃkramituṃati-bahu, ati-bahuṃ adv. “sehr viel”

§ 40.11.33A4. na dāni atibahu oṣṭha prakṣipitavyā

§ 40.12.33A4. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane-tavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-vandaka~

pāda-vandaka~

“die Füße zu verehren beabsichtigend”;

vgl. § 44.1, Anm. 3; BHSG §§ 22.2f.

⇒ uśvāsa-kāraka~, praśvāsa-kāraka~

§ 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi

比丘威儀法詞典

adarśanena priyaṃ √kṛ #

adarśanena priyaṃ √kṛ #

“vorziehen, zu verschwinden”?

☞ § 49.7, Anm. 5

§ 49.7.42B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati “dinnā mama āṇattikā” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ

§ 50.2.43A5. evaṃ ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi

§ 50.3.43A5. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nīhārikapiṇḍapātena piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ

§ 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

adhy-upekṣa-(BHS)(°upa-√īkṣ)

adhy-upekṣa-(BHS)(°upa-√īkṣ)

“hinwegsehen”

§ 4.11.5A3. atha dāni so manuṣyo anācīrṇṇadāno vā bhavati, tintiṇo vā bhavati, na dāni adhyupekṣitavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ ...

§ 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā ...

§ 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ...

§ 11.9.11A1. tato na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā adhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 13.12.12B4)

§ 12.18.12A5. nâpi kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, mañcā vā pīṭhā vā oddriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā adhyupekṣituṃ

§ 14.5.13A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati so vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ...

§ 17.10.15A4. nâpi dāni adhyupekṣitavyaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā

§ 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, na tadā adhyupekṣitavyaṃ

§ 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ ...

§ 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā ...

§ 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ...

§ 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā

§ 43.11.38A7. nâpi dāni kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā oddriṇṇakā vā ... apratisaṃskṛtā vā

§ 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ uppaṃsulo vā acaukṣo vā

§ 44.11.39B1. na kṣamati cīvaraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ cikkaṇaṃ vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayilamayilam vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā

§ 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, na kṣamati so ’dhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 55.6.46B7)

§ 54.8.46A4. ete dāni bhikṣuḥ pracalāyanti, nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ

§ 54.12.46A7. atha dāni bhikṣu<sya> upādhyāyācāryā pracalāyanti, na kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ

§ 55.10.47A1. na kṣamati so geṇḍuko adhyupekṣituṃ pāṭitavipāṭito

§ 56.7.47A7. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 57.12.48A1. nâpi kṣamati upānahā adhyupekṣituṃ odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

analpakena#

analpakena#

“reichlich”;

vgl. SWTF. an-alpaka, Pā. anappaka

§ 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī-niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

an-ākalpa-sampanna~#

an-ākalpa-sampanna~#

“eine äußere Erscheinung habend, die zu wünschen übrigläßt”;

vgl. CPD, s.v. an-ākappa-sampanna (“not decently attired”)

☞ § 7.1, Anm. 4

§ 7.1.8A6. anākalpasampannāḥ anīryāpathasampannāḥ (= § 9.1.9B5)

比丘威儀法詞典

an-āpatti~

an-āpatti~

“kein Vergehen”

§ 11.11.11A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ

§ 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita bhavati varcakuṭī, kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ

§ 18.17.16A5. kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā, anāpattiḥ

§ 20.12.20A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ... , kiñ câpi saṃghavigrahe dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, anāpattiḥ

§ 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ

§ 23.4.2.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati ... “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ

§ 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ... pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ

§ 31.3.25B3. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi bhavati, sarvveṣām anāpattiḥ

§ 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ

§ 40.16.33B1. kiñ câpi deti, anāpattiḥ

§ 40.16.33B2. kiñ câpi tato yeva pibati ... anāpattiḥ

§ 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ

§ 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ

§ 42.22.37A7. nābhimātraṃ vā udakaṃ, anāpattiḥ

§ 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ

§ 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ

§ 57.11.48A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 60.5.48B7. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ

§ 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

an-ā-pṛcchitvā

an-ā-pṛcchitvā

⇒ ā-√pṛcch

比丘威儀法詞典

aneka-paryāyeṇa (SWTF)

an-okṣīṇaka~#

“ungeschält(er Reis)”?;

< an + *ut-kṣīṇa, *apa-kṣīṇa oder *ava-kṣīṇa

☞ § 48.8, Anm. 1

⇒ *ukkhīṇaka~

§ 48.8.41B5. labhyā dāni ... gṛhṇituṃ ... harītakī vā taṇḍulāni vā anokṣīṇakā vā mālyam vā aklinnakaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

an-otrāpin~ (BHS, SWTF)

an-otrāpin~ (BHS, SWTF)

“unverschämt, rücksichtslos”;

vgl. Pā. an-ottappin

§ 37.5.30A3. aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ, ahrīkā tīrthikāḥ, anotrāpino tīrthikāḥ, mithyādṛṣṭikā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

anopavāda~#

anopavāda~#

“Nicht-Tadeln, Nicht-Aussetzen”;

< an-upavāda

☞ § 37.5, Anm. 2

§ 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde (< °āśrāmiṇāṃ anopavāde [Nom. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG§ 8.25]; ☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 3) kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-śauca~

pādukā~

⇒ tāla-pādukā~

比丘威儀法詞典

antara-pīḍita~#

antara-pīḍita~#

“gepresst in der Mitte” (?)

§ 44.5.39A3. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito

比丘威儀法詞典

pādodaka~ (°da-uda°)

pādodaka~ (°da-uda°)

⇒ hastodaka-p°

§ 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ

§ 10.5.10A5. kheṭakaṭāhaṃ niṣkāśayitavyaṃ yāvat pādodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ,

比丘威儀法詞典

anyadâpi

anyadâpi

“auch zu anderer Zeit”

§ 41.11.34A7. bhagavān āha “na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo.” “’nyadâpi bhagavan?” “anyadâpi bhikṣavo.”

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-karṣa-

*apakka-laḍḍu~

“kugelförmiger Lehmziegel” (?)

☞ § 20.18, Anm. 2

§ 20.18.20A4. atha dāni dantakāṣṭhaṃ na bhavati, aṅgāreṇa vā apakkalaḍḍunā (Hs.°laddunā) vā dantā oghasayitavyāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-cāyita~

apa-dura-#

“(die Tür) öffnen”;

∈ *ava’ura- < *apavurati (aus Skt. apa-√vṛ “öffnen”)?

☞ § 8.4, Anm. 3

⇒ apa-duraka~, apā-vura-, *apa-duvara-, apāvuraṇa~, apāvuraṇi~

§ 8.4.8B7. dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo

§ 10.4.10A5. dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇaṃ prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo

§ 22.1.20B6. so dāni yathāsukhe kṛte vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati

§ 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ (oder lies: *apaduv{v}ari°?) cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ ...

§ 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... dvāraṃ apaduriya tato praviśitavyaṃ

§ 31.20.26A4. vihāro ... ghaṭṭitako bhavati, apāvuraṇena apaduriyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 42.2.36A3. jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-duraka~#

apa-duraka~#

“offen”

⇒ apa-dura-

§ 31.20.26A3. atha dāni apadurako vihāro bhavati, praviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

*apa-duvara-#?

*apa-duvara-#?

“öffnen”;

Denominativ von apa + *duvāra (< dvāra)?

⇒ apa-dura-, apā-vura-, apāvuraṇa~, apāvuraṇi~

§ 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apaduccaritavyaṃ (lies: *apaduv{v}ari° oder apadu{cca}ri°) cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-niya

apa-niya

(Abs.; vgl. Skt = Pā. apa-nīya)

⇒ apa-√nī

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-√nī

apa-√nī

§ 1.10.2A2. atha khalu hastāṃ nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya (Abs.; vgl. Skt = Pā. apa-nīya) upānahāṃ omuñciya ekāṃsakṛtena śalākā vārayitavyā

§ 1.10.2A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena hastān nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā

§ 15.7.14A3. taṃ apaniya anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā sthāpayitavyā

§ 40.12.33A5. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane-tavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

apara~

apara~

(1) “ein anderer”

§ 10.5.10A6. evaṃ aparaṃ divasaṃ prasrāvakumbhikā niṣkāśayitavyā

§ 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati, tahiṃ ca aparo bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo

§ 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ...

§ 21.5.20B2. atha dāni aparo pi koci sīvayitukāmo bhavati, ... (≒ § 21.6.20B4)

§ 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito (≒ § 28.1.24A1)

§ 62.2.49B6. eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. ...”

§ 20.11.19B6. aparaṃ divasaṃ evam eva khāditavyaṃ

§ 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ

§ 32.4.27A7. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddham vācovāciṃ karoti, nâpi kṣamati tasya taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ

§ 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ

§ 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ

§ 42.18.37A3. hastena agrato praticchādayitavyaṃ apareṇa parikarmma kārayitavyaṃ

§ 50.1.43A3. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato. taṃ dāni {āha} apareṇa āgacchiyāṇaṃ utkṣiptaṃ

§ 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo, aparasya vaddhro pocchitavyo

§ 18.7.15B5. aparasmin pārśve varccakuṭīkā karttavyā

§ 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs)

§ 39.3.31A2. nâpi kṣamati aparehi ... utkṣipituṃ usw.

(2) “irgendeiner, ein gewisser”(BHS[Mvu])

§ 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati, tahiṃ ca aparo bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo

§ 20.9.19B5. aparo dāni bhikṣu dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati

§ 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito (≒ § 27.2.23B5, § 28.1.24A1)

§ 32.1.27A4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgantuko āgato. tasya dāni aparo bhikṣuḥ vṛddhatarako parijñātako bhavati, so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācovācikāṃ karoti

§ 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre ... nirddhāvito bhavati

§ 14.1.13A1. aparaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati

§ 52.5.44B4. sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ, lūhaṃ ca praṇītaṃ ca ekañ ca aparaṃ ca

§ 18.15.16A3. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ

§ 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako

§ 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito

§ 25.1.22B1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā muṇḍavātapāṇe pātraṃ sthavitaṃ

§ 41.5.34A1. sthaviro dāni apareṇa brāhmaṇena dṛṣṭo

§ 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.”

§ 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ (für aparahiṃ?; Loc. sg. masc. neut.) jñātisāle (für °śāle) nimantritako gato varṣârātrikaṃ

§ 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ (für aparahiṃ?; Loc. sg. masc.) vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkrama<ṃ>tiusw.

比丘威儀法詞典

apara-kālena#

apara-kālena#

“später”;

vgl. Skt = Pa.Pā. apara-kāla

§ 32.2.27A5. te dāni aparakālena ubhaye samāgatā

比丘威儀法詞典

aparejjukāto (BHS[Mvu])

aparejjukāto (BHS[Mvu])

“am nächsten Tag”;

< Skt. aparedyus; vgl. Pā. aparajju

⇒ aparejjukāye

§ 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aparejjukāto kalyato utthihantakena͡iva bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ

§ 31.30.26B4. atha aparejjukāto yadi tāva bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ bhavati, anugraho vā bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha.”

§ 39.2.30B7. aparejjukāto kalyato yeva utthihiya ...

§ 39.15.31B3. atha dāni vikāle āgacchanti, na vâgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ dātavyaṃ

§ 39.27.32A4. atha dāni vikāle āgatā bhavanti, na vā āgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vā ārāmikānām vā dātavyo

§ 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya ...

§ 44.6.39A4. aparejjukāto bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya

比丘威儀法詞典

aparejjukāye#

aparejjukāye#

“am nächsten Tag”

☞ § 5.6, Anm. 2

⇒ aparejjukāto

§ 5.6.6B2. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye ’va (Hs. ca) māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

apalekha~#

apalekha~#

“Spatel zum Abkratzen (des Schmutzes)”

☞ § 18.16, Anm. 4

⇒ avalekhana~

§ 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-vātam#

apa-vātam#

“in Lee; unter dem Wind” oder “zur vom Wind abgewandten Seite”?

☞ § 18.46, Anm. 2

⇒ anuvātam

§ 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā. apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ (≒ § 18.48.17A7, § 19.38.19A2)

§ 19.40.19A2. nâpi dāni anuv<ātaṃ k>artt{it}avyaṃ. apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ ... apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ, vātapathaṃ muñcitvā

比丘威儀法詞典

apa-vāmaṃ#

apa-vāmaṃ#

“links”;

< apa + Skt. vāma

☞ § 31.6, Anm. 2

⇒ anu-vāmam, vāma~, ati-dakṣiṇam, abhi-dakṣiṇam

§ 31.6.25B5. na dāni kṣamati nagaracetiyāni abhidakṣiṇaṃ (Hs. °iṇi) karentehi vā gantuṃ apavāmaṃ (Hs. °āmi) vā karentehi {vā}

比丘威儀法詞典

apā-vura-#

apā-vura-#

“öffnen”;

< Skt. apa-ā-√vṛ;

vgl. BHDBHSD, s.v. apāvurīyati; Pā. apāpurati

⇒ apa-dura-, *apa-duvara-, apāvuraṇa~, apāvuraṇi~

§ 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo, yathā vātaṃ labheyyā

比丘威儀法詞典

api

api

⇒ pi, pi ... pi, anyadâpi, kiñ câpi, na câpi, nâpi, nâpi dāni, yathâpi

§ 30.1.24B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpenti, uttānakâpi śeyyā kalpenti, vāmenâpi pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpenti (api ... api ... api: “entweder ... oder ... oder ...” ☞ § 30.1, Anm. 3) (≒ § 30.2.24B7)

§ 39.3.31A2. nâpi kṣamati ... utkṣipituṃ

§ 39.7.31A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ

§ 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo

§ 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. āraṇyakâpi tāva nâgacchanti”

§ 41.16.34B6. tenâpi dāni corasenāpatinā ... upalakṣitaṃ

§ 41.21.35A5. tadâpi etasya eṣo ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo

§ 41.23.35A6. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ

§ 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati ... upaviśituṃ

§ 41.31.35B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... āsituṃ

§ 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttukāmo bhavati

§ 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni ...

§ 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ

§ 49.5.42A7. tenâpi dāni pureśramaṇena nâpi kṣamati ... gantuṃ

§ 49.7.42B4. tenâpi dāni ... āhāraṃ kṛtvā nâpi dāni kṣamati ... karttuṃ

§ 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ...”et passim

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pūrvva-carimam#

a-pūrvva-carimam#

“gleichzeitig (lit. ohne früher und später)”;

vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L)§ 106, 2B7.4.apūrvācarimaṃ; AS.34.19 = AAA.226.22.apūrvācaramam (AS.199.25 = AAA.792.17); Mvy(S).Mvy.2703.apūrvam acaramam(= Mvy[I/F].2712), Mvy(S).Mvy.6659.apūrvācaramaḥ(= Mvy[I/F].6633)

§ 42.18.37A3. parikarmma karentena na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ (lies: apūrvvâcarimaṃ?) ubhaya bāhā prasāretavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

a-peyya~ (Pā)

a-peyya~ (Pā)

“nicht zu trinken”;

vgl. Skt. peya;

☞ § 26.1, Anm. 3

⇒ peyā~

§ 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.”

比丘威儀法詞典

appihāṇa~#

appihāṇa~#

“Bedeckung, Hülle, Decke”;

vgl. Skt. = Pā. apidhāna~ (“dass.”), Pkt. pidhāṇa, pihāṇa (“dass.”)

§ 40.5.32B6. appihāṇā karttavyā śilāmayā vā mṛttikāmayā vā kāṣṭhamayā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

a-prakīrṇṇavāca~#

a-prakīrṇṇavāca~#

“keine wirren Worte sagend”

☞ § 38.4, Anm. 4

§ 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

a-prakṛtika~

a-prakṛtika~

“unvorsichtig”#

☞ § 19.16, Anm. 1

⇒ a-prakṛti-jña~

§ 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti

比丘威儀法詞典

a-prakṛti-jña~#

a-prakṛti-jña~#

“jemand, der keine Sitten kennt”;

☞ § 24.12, Anm. 3; § 19.16, Anm. 1

⇒ a-prakṛtika~

§ 24.12.22A7. <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pragalbha~

a-pragalbha~

“bescheiden; nicht arrogant”

§ 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pratigrāhya~

a-pratigrāhya~

“von dem man nichts annehmen darf”

§ 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pratisaṃviditena#

a-pratisaṃviditena#

“ohne Ankündigung; ohne daß man sich abgemeldet hat”;

vgl. BHS, SWTF. apratisaṃvidita; Pā. appaṭisaṃvidita

⇒ a-pratisaṃviditvā, pratisaṃviditena, saṃviditena, aśabdakarṇṇikāye

§ 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ, mā “coro vā ocorako vā” tti hanyeyā (≒ § 19.39.19A2)

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pratisaṃviditvā#

a-pratisaṃviditvā#

“ohne Ankündigung; ohne daß man sich abgemeldet hat”

⇒ a-pratisaṃviditena, aśabdakarṇṇikāye

§ 53.14.45B4. (eine Lampe) na dāni sahasākārasya apratisaṃviditvā nirvvāpetavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pratisaṃskṛta~#

a-pratisaṃskṛta~#

“unrepariert; nicht instand gehalten”

⇒ prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ

§ 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā apratisaṃskṛto vā

§ 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakān ondriṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (≒ § 13.2.12A6, § 23.1.21A4)

§ 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ...

§ 12.5.11B2. ye vihārakā uddiṇṇakā paluggakā ... acokṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā bhavanti

§ 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā ollāye gṛhītakāḥ acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ...

§ 14.5.13A4. so vihāro ... ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā acaukṣo vā apratisaṃskṛto vā

§ 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddiṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acaukṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (≒ § 16.2.14A6)

§ 15.3.14A1. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtāḥ (≒ § 16.3.14A6, § 16.5.14A7, § 17.5.14B7)

§ 17.2.14B5. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (Hs. anabhisaṃskṛtāṃ)

§ 17.8.15A2. ete vihārakā ullāye gṛhītakā bhavanti apratisaṃskṛtā vā uppaṃsulā vā ...

§ 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye gṛhītakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā

§ 43.11.38A7. kalpikakuṭī ... praluggikā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā

§ 44.11.39B1. cīvaraṃ ... cikkaṇaṃ vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayilamayilam vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pratyagra~

a-pramāṇa~

§ 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha

比丘威儀法詞典

a-pramāda~

a-pramāda~

§ 2.11.3A5. apramādena saṃpādayitavyaṃ (= § 3.12.4A4)

§ 7.7.8B5. antamasato vaktavyo “apramādena saṃpādehî”ti

比丘威儀法詞典

a-manāpa~

amuka~

⇒ asuka~

§ 4.8.4B7. amukaṃ kulaṃ upasaṃkramiṣyatha

§ 8.11.9A7. vaktavyaṃ “karomi amukena saha svādhyāyan” ti (≒ § 8.13.9B3)

§ 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.”

§ 12.12.11B7. amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ...

Vgl.

§ 12.10.11B5. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ...

§ 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutīkṛtaṃ. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ

§ 32.2.27A5. amukaṃ divasaṃ tvaṃ amukena bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācaṃvāciṃ karosi

§ 49.8.42B7. atha dāni koci vandati, vaktavyaṃ “amuko vandati”

§ 49.8.42B7. ārocayitavyaṃ “amukena upādhyāyo nimantrito. amukena (lies: amukasya?) vā antaraghare bhuṃja” ti

比丘威儀法詞典

arthotpatti~# (artha-ut°)

arthotpatti~# (artha-ut°)

“Ursprung (einer Belehrung/Vorschrift) aufgrund eines besonderen Anlasses; ein (besonderer) Anlaß”;

vgl. Pā. aṭṭh’uppatti

☞ § 18.15, Anm. 1

§ 18.15.16A2. eṣa͡ivârthotpattiḥ. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati ... (= § 20.6.19B2)

§ 18.20.16A6. eṣā evârthotpattiḥ. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati ... (= § 19.6.17B7, § 20.4. 19A7, § 42.2.36A2, § 54.3.46A2, § 55.3.46B4)

比丘威儀法詞典

arddha-paryaṅka~ (BHS)

arddha-paryaṅka~ (BHS)

“Sitzhaltung mit einem gebeugten (und einem angezogenen) Bein”

☞ § 29.6, Anm. 3

⇒ paryaṅka~, svastika-paryaṅka~

§ 29.6.24B3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ, arddhaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ

§ 29.6.24B4. atha dāni arddhaparyaṅkenâpi na pāreti niṣīdituṃ, ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ava-sthāpaya-

a-vidūreṇa#

“nicht sehr weit entfernt”;

vgl. Skt = Pā. a-vidūre

§ 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

aśubha-samāpatti~#

aśubha-samāpatti~#

“Meditation über das Unreine”;

vgl. CPD, s.v. asubha-samāpatti; BHSD, s.v. aśubha-bhāvanā

§ 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntaragateṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubhasamāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

*asma-parṣā~

*asma-parṣā~

“unsere Versammlung”;

< *asmat-parṣā~

§ 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ (Hs. câsmip°) upasaṃ-kramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati √ah

§ 1.1.1B1. āhaṃsu “no dīrghāyu”

§ 1.1.1B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu “saṃghasthaviro nâgacchati”

§ 1.11.2A4. atha dāni āhaṃsu “vasiṣyāma” tti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva ...”

§ 20.1.19A5. so dān’ āha

§ 1.3.1B4. āha “āma bhagavan” (= § 20.2.19A7)

§ 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.”

§ 4.18.5B6. yo nīharati dānena dinnaṃ taṃ āhu (3. pl.) tihutaṃ (lies: *nīhṛt°) (vs)

§ 20.5.19B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu

§ 20.7.19B4. āhaṃsu (= § 39.1.30B6, § 39.1.30B7, § 39.2.31A1, § 48.2.41A6 usw.)

§ 26.2.23A6. te dāni śabdāpitāḥ, etad eva pṛcchiyanti, āha (3. sg. perf. für 3. pl.) “āma bhagavan!”

§ 39.2.31A1. te dāni teṣāṃ āraṇyakānāṃ āhaṃsu

§ 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha (= § 39.3.31A1, § 40.2.32B3, § 40.2.32B3, § 40.3.32B4, § 41.2.33B4, § 41.2.33B6, § 41.11.34A7, § 41.21.35A4, § 42.1.36A2, § 42.4.36A6, § 42.4.36A7, § 44.2.39A1, § 45.2.39B4, § 45.3.39B5, § 46.2.40A4, § 46.2.40A5, § 46.3.40A6, § 47.2.40B4, § 47.3.40B5, § 48.2.41A4, § 48.3.41A6 et passim)

§ 3.3.3B1. āhaṃsuḥ (= § 13.3.12B1, § 40.2.32B4, § 42.2.36A3, § 42.3.36A4~5 usw.)

§ 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ (3. pl. aor. für 3. sg; in der Funktion des Optativs; ☞ § 39.22[Text], Anm. 2) “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ...

§ 39.26.32A3. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, ...

§ 41.1.33B3. te dāni āhaṃsuḥ

§ 41.2.33B6. āhaṃsu “āma bhagavan” (= § 42.4.36A7, § 45.2.39B5, § 46.2.40A5, § 47.2.40B5 et passim)

§ 41.11.34A7. bhikṣū dāni bhagavantam āhaṃsu

§ 41.15.34B5. so ... tasya dārakasyâha

§ 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha

§ 42.4.36A7. yūyaṃ dāni āhaṃsu (3. pl. für 2. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 25.31)

§ 42.20.37A5. dānapati āhaṃsuḥ

§ 42.21.37A5. atha dāni prakṛty’ eva āhaṃsuḥ

§ 42.21.37A6. antevāsiko sārddhevihāriko vā āhaṃsu

§ 42.21.37A6. upāsakā vā karmmakarā ārāmikā vā āhaṃsu

§ 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ, āhaṃsu (gebraucht als 3. sg.; vgl. BHSG §§ 33.1, 6) “ādiśa dakṣiṇāṃ” et passim

比丘威儀法詞典

ākalpa~

ā-√kāṅkṣ

§ 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ

§ 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-ṇape- (BHS[Mvu])

ā-ṇape- (BHS[Mvu])

“befehlen”;

Skt. ā-jñāpayati; vgl. Pā. āṇāpeti, Pkt. āṇavei

⇒ āṇattikā~

§ 33.7.28A3. vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā. kiṃ āṇapesi (Hs. āṇapehi)?

§ 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ ... “kiṃ āṇapesî(Hs. a°)?”tti, “kiṃ karemi?”

§ 33.10.28A4. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohite, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karemi?”

§ 33.13.28A6. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohita, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karomi?” tti

比丘威儀法詞典

ātapa~

ātapa~

⇒ vātātapa~

§ 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ (≒ § 11.3.10B4)

§ 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ sivitavyaṃ, kālena kālaṃ ātape dātavyaṃ

§ 18.8.15B7. tena tāni kuṇḍakāni ... kālena kālaṃ ātape śoṣayitavyāni

§ 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... kāṣṭhamayāni bhavanti, na kṣamati ātape{na} śoṣayituṃ

§ 19.24.18B3. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 19.25.18B3. mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... ātape vā dātavyo {yo} bhūyo praveśayitavyo

§ 41.9.34A5. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ (lies: °yitaṃ ?)

§ 41.9.34A5. dakānakaṃ dhoviya pānīyāvaśeṣaṃ cchoriya ātape śoṣitaṃ

§ 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhovitavyaṃ pīḍiya ātape śoṣayitavyaṃ

§ 43.5.38A5. te ... ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ

§ 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya, ātape śoṣayitavyā

§ 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti

§ 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

āma (BHS, Pā, Pkt, Skt<span style="vertical-align:super">1</span> )

āma (BHS, Pā, Pkt, Skt1 )

“Ja”

§ 1.3.1B4. āha “āma bhagavan” (= § 4.3.4B1, § 20.2.19A7, § 49.2.42A5 et passim)

§ 20.7.19B4. āhaṃsu “āma bhagavan” (= § 41.2.33B6, § 42.4.36A7, § 45.2.39B5, § 46.2.40A5, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.2.41A6 et passim)

比丘威儀法詞典

āsana-prajñapti~#

āsana-prajñapti~#

“das Herrichten von Sitzgelegenheiten”;

vgl. Pāṇḍ-v 292v5, 8, Poṣ-v 60v10, Pravā-v 69r7 usw.; CPD, s.v. āsanapaññatti(“allocation, assignment, appointment of seats”)

§ 1.8.1B7. poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ ... āsanaprajñapti karttavyā (= § 2.6.2B6)

§ 3.7.3B5. poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcitavyaṃ ... gomayakārṣī dātavyā āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā

§ 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara-bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ...

§ 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā

§ 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

ā-sthapaya-#

ā-haṇa-#

“schlagen”;

< ā-√han

⇒ ā-√han, ā-hane-

§ 4.7.4B5. raṇaraṇā gaṇḍi āhaṇiya vaktavyaṃ: “āyuṣman vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho ...”

§ 4.7.4B6. tato raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍī āhaṇiya <praviśitavyaṃ>

§ 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ ārocitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ

§ 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 6.7.7B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya ... pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ

§ 17.5.14B7. tato raṇaraṇāye gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya sarvvasaṃghena sannipatitavyaṃ

§ 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati”

§ 39.25.32A2. atha dāni āha “āhaṇatha tumhe. grāmāntikâpi eṣyantî”ti

§ 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-grāya-#

upa-grāya-#

“rülpsen”;

vgl. ud-2√gr̥̄ (“ausspeien”), upa-2√gr̥̄ (“einschlucken” [PW])

☞ § 4.13, Anm. 4

⇒ u-grāya-

§ 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti, upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti ...

比丘威儀法詞典

upacāra~

upacāra~

⇒ darśanopacāra~

比丘威儀法詞典

āhāra-paryeṣṭi~#

āhāra-paryeṣṭi~#

“Suchen nach Speise”;

vgl. Pā. āhāra-pariyeṭṭhi; BHS. paryeṣṭi

§ 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ (Hs. °paryeptiṃ) paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

itikitikāya-putra~#

itikitikāya-putra~#

“Hurensohn” (Schimpfwort) < “Sohn einer Hetäre”

☞ § 41.5, Anm. 2

§ 41.5.34A1. ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti, nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti

比丘威儀法詞典

iti-pravṛttaka~#

iti-pravṛttaka~#

“so angefangen”?

☞ § 36.6, Anm. 9

§ 36.6.29B6. sarvve itipravṛttakā karttavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

upa-cīrṇṇa~

upa-cīrṇṇa~

§ 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

ut-thāpaya- (BHS[BHSG, S. 237a, s.v. sthāpaya-ti])

ut-thāpīya-#

“zugeteilt werden; bereitgestellt werden”

☞§ 8.13, Anm. 5

⇒ ut-thāpaya- usw.

§ 8.13.9B3. yāvan na utthāpīyati, sā evam e<va> āpṛcchanikā. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

utpatti~

utpatti~

⇒ arthotpatti~

比丘威儀法詞典

ut-padya-

ut-padya-

“entstehen”

⇒ ut-pādaya-

§ 8.11.9A7. yadi so bhavati śaithaliko vā ... vaktavyaṃ “mâśrayo utpadyeyā”

§ 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6)

比丘威儀法詞典

utpāta-gaṇḍa-piṭaka~#

utpāta-gaṇḍa-piṭaka~#

“an Geschwülsten (?), Beulen oder Pusteln leidend”

☞ § 42.3, Anm. 6

§ 42.3.36A5. utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati

比丘威儀法詞典

ut-pādaka~

ut-pādaka~

“auf dem Kopf stehend”#

☞§ 11.2, Anm. 1

⇒ up-pādaka~

§ 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ utthitakaṃ

§ 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā utthitakam vā ...

§ 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) utpādakaṃ bhavati, sam<aṃ th>āpetavyaṃ

§ 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ...

比丘威儀法詞典

ut-pādaya-

ut-pādaya-

“entstehen lassen, hervorbringen”

⇒ ut-padya-

§ 42.31.37B7. mā ādīnavam utpādaye

§ 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā (Hs. °eṣyā)

§ 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti” tti

§ 54.16.46B2. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me karentî”ti

比丘威儀法詞典

ut-pīḍita~

ut-pīḍita~

“bedrängt”#

⇒ up-pīḍita~, up-pīḍaya-, up-pīlita~

§ 18.21.16B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti

§ 18.29.16B4. atha dāni bhikṣū utpīḍito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ... gacchituṃ

§ 18.33.16B6. atha dāni sahasā utpīḍito bhavati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

udu-pāna~ (BHS)

udu-pāna~ (BHS)

“Brunnen(haus)”

§ 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 12.10.11B5. varccakuṭī udupāno jantāko caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

udupāna-kūla~#

udgamana~

⇒ sūryodgamana~

比丘威儀法詞典

uddeśa-prayukta~#

uddeśa-prayukta~#

“sich in der Rezitation übend”

§ 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ

§ 30.8.25A5. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā

§ 39.16.31B4. tatra͡iva sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi viharitavyaṃ uddeśa-prayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā

§ 39.28.32A6. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi ... sthānacaṃkrama-niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā

§ 41.31.35B7. uddeśaprayuktena vā manasikāraprayuktena vā middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upānahā~ (BHS)

upānahā~ (BHS)

“Sandale”

⇒ upānah~, upānahikā~, cchatropānahā~, sa-upānaha~, sopānaha~

§ 1.10.2A2. upānahāṃ omuñciya (= § 2.8.2B7, § 3.9.3B7)

§ 24.6.22A3. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavya

§ 26.5.23B1. upānahā ni<k>khāsiya ekāṃsakṛtena yavāgū praticchitavyā

§ 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryante<na> upānahā{ṃ}hi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya-parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 35.4.29A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cchatreṇa vā dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi brāhmaṇaparṣā āllīyituṃ

§ 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapati-parṣā upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ

§ 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ upānahāhi (Loc. pl. fem.; Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya

§ 41.2.33B5. ārdrapādāṃ upānahāsu prakṣipiya

§ 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito dvitīyasya upānahā (Gen. sg. fem.) vaddhro pocchito ekasya upānahā (Gen. sg. fem.) talaṃ pocchitaṃ dvitīyasya upānahā (Gen. sg. fem.) talaṃ pocchitaṃ

§ 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpiḍitvā upānahā nirmmādayitavyā

§ 41.24.35A7. upānahāyo prasphoṭitvā saṃpuṭīkṛtvā

§ 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo

§ 41.24.35A7. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5)

§ 41.24.35B1. dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ

§ 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi (Loc. pl. fem.) ārdrapādena praveśayituṃ

§ 41.29.35B5. upānahāyo saṃpuṭī-kariya

§ 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo

§ 41.29.35B6. adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ upānahāyāṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇa ... upānahā gṛhṇituṃ

§ 57.1.47B1. te ... prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti

§ 57.2.47B1. evaṃ upānahāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 57.13.48A1);

Uddāna (VII).50B1. evam upānahāye (Hs. upādhyāye) pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena upānahā nikkhāsiya ...

§ 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ

§ 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ

§ 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ

§ 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ

§ 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, upānahāyo ābandhiya navakānte saṃprajānaṃ gantavyaṃ

§ 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ

§ 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

upānahā-pocchana~#

upānahā-pocchana~#

“Wischtuch für Sandalen”;

vgl. Pā. upāhana-puñchana-coḷaka~

☞ § 41.6, Anm. 4

⇒ upānahā-pocchanaka~, upānahā-pocchana-nattaka~

§ 41.6.34A3. upānahāpocchano (Hs. °hāyocch°) upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati

§ 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano (Hs. °hāyocch°) dhoviya pīḍiya tatra͡iva sthapitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upānahā-pocchanaka~#

upānahā-pocchanaka~#

“Wischtuch für Sandalen”

☞ § 41.6, Anm. 4

⇒ upānahā-pocchana~

§ 41.9.34A5. dakṣiṇena hastena upānahāpocchanakaṃ (Hs. °āyocch°) dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ (lies: °yitaṃ ?)

§ 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ (Hs. °hāyocch°) dhovitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upānahā-pocchana-nattaka~#

upānahārūḍha~# (°nahā + ārūḍha)

“Sandalen tragend”;

Pā. upāhanārūḷha (z.B. Vin V 31.37)

§ 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikā{ya}kṛtena upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ vārayituṃ

§ 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ

§ 2.8.2B7~3A1. na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ ... na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā ... śalākāṃ praticchituṃ (= § 3.9. 3B7)

§ 26.5.23A7. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū upānahārūḍhena vā praticchituṃ

§ 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati ... upānahārūḍhena vā tiṣṭhituṃ khaṃbhakṛtena vā ...

§ 27.8.23B7. kiñ câpi upānahārūḍho (Hs. opā°) oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo vā ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ

§ 32.8.27B3. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitakāyena. na kṣamati ohitahastena. na kṣamati upānahārūḍhena

§ 54.6.46A4. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

upānahikā~#

upānahikā~#

“Sandale”

☞ § 41.6, Anm. 3;

vgl. upānah~, upānahā~

§ 41.6.34A3. upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahāpocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati

§ 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ...

§ 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā ...

§ 57.5.47B3. anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya

§ 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upāntake#

upāntake#

“um sich herum; in der Nähe”;

vgl. Skt. upānta~, upāntika~

§ 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake (Hs. uṣāntake)

比丘威儀法詞典

upārambhaṇābhiprāya~ (°bhaṇa-abhi°)#

upārambhaṇābhiprāya~ (°bhaṇa-abhi°)#

“die Absicht, einen Vorwurf zu machen”

⇒ viheṭhanābhiprāya~

§ 53.10.45B1. nâpi kṣamati tena upārambhaṇābhiprāyeṇa dīpo vārayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

Upālin~ (BHS, SWTF)

Upālin~ (BHS, SWTF)

☞ § 33.4, Anm. 2

§ 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram-iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?”

比丘威儀法詞典

upāśraya~

upāśraya~

“Lehne, Stützkissen” (pw.)

⇒ sāpāśraya~, bhikṣuṇī-upāśraya~

§ 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam (?; Hs. opā°) vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}vipāṇḍaraṃ apāśrayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upāsaka~

upāsaka~

§ 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo nāma upāsako? (= § 5.7.6B3)

§ 6.7.7B4. koci ima<ṃ>hi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī vā vāṇijako vā?

§ 4.7.4B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti asmākaṃ koci evaṃnāma upāsako”

§ 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko (≒ § 6.5.7B2)

§ 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako

§ 5.7.6B4. bhante kisya upāsako? kahiṃ upāsako? <nâsti> ’tināmâsmākaṃ koci upāsako

§ 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. kissa (od. kaḥ sa; Hs. kiḥ sa) upāsako?

§ 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti

§ 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā

§ 39.9.31A5. yadi koci upāsako saṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati

§ 42.21.37A6. upāsakā vā karmmakarā ārāmikā vā āhaṃsu usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

upāsaka-kula~ (Pā)

upāsaka-kula~ (Pā)

§ 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi (Loc. pl.) sthāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

upāsakā~#

upāsakā~#

“Laienanhängerin”

☞ § 33.11, Anm. 1

⇒ upāsikā~

§ 33.11.28A4~5. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu-kāmo bhavati, ... “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā “vihārasvāmini” ti vā śabdāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

eka-puṭa~ (BHS)

eka-puṭa~ (BHS)

⇒ -puṭa~

比丘威儀法詞典

eka-putraka~

eka-putraka~

“der einzige Sohn”

§ 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ (Hs. °ko) viya

§ 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi

§ 20.2.19A6. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya

比丘威儀法詞典

eka-bhakta-tarppaṇa~#

ekamantena#

“beiseite”

⇒ ekatam’ ante, ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekānte, ekāntake, ekāntena

§ 19.31.18B6. atha khalu ekamantena praśvāso karttavyo

§ 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

otāra-prekṣin~

o-trapa-#

“verlegen werden, sich schämen”;

< Skt. apa-trapate; vgl. Pā. ottapati, ottappati, BHSD, s.v. otrapa, otrapya (“shame”)

§ 4.13.5A6. mā h’ eva otrapeṃsu

比丘威儀法詞典

odana-sampatti~#

odriṇṇaka~#

“zerspalten”

⇒ oddiṇṇaka~ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

o-hayiyāpe-#

o-hayiyāpe-#

“(mit Kot) beschmutzt werden lassen”;

Kausativ von o-hayiya- (“beschmutzt werden”)

☞ § 18.4, Anm. 7, § 11.2, Anm. 3

⇒ o-haya-

§ 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya-kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā (Hs. ohapi°)

比丘威儀法詞典

oharapāra-yukta~

*ohāyita-hasta~#

“mit herunterhängenden Armen” (?);

< Skt. ava-√dhā

☞ § 18.27, Anm. 1

⇒ ohita-hasta~

§ 18.27.16B4. nâpi kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohāyitahastena (Hs. oha°) vā varccakuṭīṃ praveṣṭuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

auddhatyābhiprāya~# (°tya-abhi°)

auddhatyābhiprāya~# (°tya-abhi°)

“die Absicht, zu stören; die Absicht, zu stören, habend”

⇒ upārambhaṇābhiprāya~, viheṭhanābhiprāya~

§ 58.1.48A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyā muktehi pārśvehi “khala khala” tti kāsanti, yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti

§ 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ

§ 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi-prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ

§ 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ

§ 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ

§ 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti

§ 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ

§ 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭena auddhatyā<bhi>prāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ

§ 59.7.48B3. nâpi kṣamati sāmāyikāyām vā upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ

§ 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa ... kaṇḍūyituṃ

§ 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ

§ 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi-prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ

§ 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ

§ 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa osaritvā indriyāṇi maṭamaṭa aṅgā<ni> bhañjantena yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ

§ 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti

§ 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ

§ 62.5.50A1. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma karttuṃ

§ 62.8.50A4. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa vātakarmma karttuṃ

§ 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe vā sāmāyikāyām vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} pharapharasya vātakarmma karttuṃ

§ 62.10.50A6. nâpi kṣamati antaragharaṃ niṣaṇṇena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ

§ 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

*katpāhaṃ#

katham

§ 4.9.5A1. praviśa<ṃ>tehi jānitavyaṃ: kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ

§ 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. ... kasya bhaktaṃ? kathaṃ bhaktaṃ?

§ 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5)

§ 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ ... na pratyālīyanti?

§ 10.2.10A4. kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ?

§ 18.30.16B5. nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “ko vā eṣo? kathaṃ vā eṣo?”, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (≒ § 18.34.16B7, § 19.14.18A4)

§ 19.32. nâyaṃ vaktavyo “ko eṣo? kim vā? katham vā etaṃ?” ti, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti

§ 33.4.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?

§ 33.5.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?

§ 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo?

§ 41.17.34B7. tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati

§ 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati”

§ 47.1.40B4. ime pi na jānanti katham antaraghare praviśantehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 47.2.40B5)

§ 48.1.41A4. ime pi na jānanti kathaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 48.2.41A6) usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

kapāṭa~

kapāṭa~

“Türflügel”

§ 25.8.22B5. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe (Hs. °āṭo) vā muṇḍavātāyane vā

§ 42.9.36B3. yena bhraṣṭikā sāmantena {karttavyaṃ} kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 42.9.36B4. dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kapāla~

kapāla~

“Schale; Scherbe”

§ 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya ...

§ 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā

比丘威儀法詞典

kapālika~

kapālika~

“Scherbe”

§ 25.1.22B1. so dāni hastāṃ nirmmādiya vihārakaṃ praviṣṭo, paśyati kapālikānāṃ rāśiṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

karpāsa~

karpāsa~

“Baumwolle”

§ 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpaṃ √kṛ

kalpika~ (BHS, SWTF)

“vorgeschrieben, vorschriftsmäßig”;

vgl. Pā. kappiya

§ 18.9.16A1. tatra cīvaravaṃśā ... karttavyāḥ, yatra bhikṣū kalpikāni cīvarakāṇi vinikṣipiya varccakuṭī praviśanti

§ 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpika-kuṭikā~#

kalpika-kuṭikā~#

“die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus”

☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3

⇒ kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭī~

§ 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā kalpiyaśālāyām vā kalpikakuṭikāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpika-kuṭī~#

kalpika-kuṭī~#

“die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus”

☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3

⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭī~

§ 43.11.38A7. nâpi dāni kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā oddriṇṇakā vā ... apratisaṃskṛtā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpiya-karakī~#

kalpiya-karakī~#

“Krug für das Wasser, das für den Gebrauch durch Mönche geeignet ist, d.h. Krug für gefiltertes Wasser”

☞ § 18.7, Anm. 7

⇒ akalpiya-karakī, ākalpiya-karkkarī~

§ 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa

§ 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi?

§ 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ

§ 40.8.33A1. tato pānīyāto kalpiyakarakī vā akalpiyakarakī vā ... pūrayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpiya-kāra~#

kalpiya-kāra~#

“ein Laie, der bestimmte Gegenstände für Mönche unmittelbar entgegennimmt, um sie für den Gebrauch durch Mönche geeignet zu machen; Mittelsmann”;

vgl. Pā. kappiyakāra, kappiyakāraka; BHS. kalpikāra, kalpikāraka

☞ § 18.4, Anm. 6

§ 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya-kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā

§ 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti, kalpiyakāro durllabho bhavati

§ 43.4.38A4. māsavārikehi vā pakṣavārikehi vā kalpiyakāraṃ śabdāviya ...

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpiya-kuṭī~#

kalpiya-kuṭī~#

“die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus”

☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3

⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, sāṃghika-kalpiyakuṭī~

§ 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo

§ 43.4.38A4. (lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ...) kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāni yathā-sthānaṃ

§ 43.5.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāḥ

§ 43.6.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya yathāsthāne praveśayitavyāni (wohl für sthāpayi-tavyāni)

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpiya-śālā~#

kalpiya-śālā~#

“Vorratsraum”; wörtl. “Haus für gesetzlich erlaubte Dinge”;

vgl. BHS. kalpika-śālā

☞ § 20.14, Anm. 3

§ 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā kalpiyaśālāyām vā kalpikakuṭikāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

kalpe- (BHS[Mvu, SP]; vgl. BHSG, S. 208a, s.v. kḷp)

kallato#

“frühmorgens”

⇒ kalyatas, kālyam, *kallikaṃ, aty-anukālye, anukallatarakaṃ, anukālaṃ, anukālyaṃ

§ 39.9.31A6. kallato (Hs. karṇṇato) yyeva āgacchatha

比丘威儀法詞典

kāmopabhogin~# (kāma-upa°)

kāmopabhogin~# (kāma-upa°)

“Genießer sinnlicher Freuden”;

vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 233. 8B7.6

⇒ kāma-bhogin~

§ 30.3.25A1. vāmena pārśvena kāmopabhoginaḥ śeyyāṃ kalpaya<n>ti

比丘威儀法詞典

vy-upa-śānta~

√vye

⇒ a-vītaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

kāla-paryantaṃ#

kāla-paryantaṃ#

“innerhalb der festgelegten Zeit;

vgl. Pā. kāla-pariyanta~ (Vism 12.21, 12.22, 10.29)

§ 39.8.31A4. atha dāni kālaparyantaṃ nâgacchanti, grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

Kāśi-janapada~

Kāśyapa~ (BHS, SWTF)

Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit

§ 4.15.5B1. Krakucchanda Konākamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs)

§ 6.13.8A4. Krakucchanda ca Kanakamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

kiñ câpi

kiñ câpi

“auch wenn”

§ 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita bhavati varcakuṭī, kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ

§ 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃ câpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ

§ 20.12.20A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ... , kiñ câpi saṃghavigrahe dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, anāpattiḥ

§ 23.4.2.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 23.4.4.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ṣaṭpañca gatāgatāṃ deti, anāpattiḥ

§ 23.6.1.21B2. atha dāni kanīyasako vihārako bhavati, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 24.11.22A7. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ

§ 25.9.22B6. atha dāni nāgadantako bhavati, kiñ câpi evam eva thapeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 27.8.23B7. atha dāni glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ... ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ

§ 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ... virecanaṃ vā pītaṃ, kiñ câpi caṃkramati, <anāpattiḥ>

§ 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ... pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ

§ 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ

§ 31.34.27A1. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti, kiñ câpi ghaṭṭenti, anāpattiḥ

§ 40.16.33B1. kiñ câpi deti, anāpattiḥ

§ 40.16.33B2. kiñ câpi tato yeva pibati ... anāpattiḥ

§ 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ

§ 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ

§ 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi ... visarjenti, anāpattiḥ

§ 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ

§ 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ

§ 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

√kup

√kup

⇒ vi-kopaya-, vi-kope-

比丘威儀法詞典

kula-putra~

kula-putra~

§ 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ...

§ 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

kula-putraka~

kula-putraka~

§ 41.13.34B2. tasya dāni śreṣṭhikasya kulaputrakā gṛhaṃ ocaranti

§ 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho

比丘威儀法詞典

kṛta-parikarmman~ (SWTF)

kṛta-parikarmman~ (SWTF)

“verputzt”# (?)

☞ § 18.35, Anm. 5

⇒ kṛta-karmman~

§ 23.3.21A6. na ha͡iva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako

比丘威儀法詞典

kṛta-puṇya~

kṛta-puṇya~

§ 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

√kḷp

√kḷp

⇒ kalpa-, kalpe-, śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-)

比丘威儀法詞典

*kelāpaya-

*kelāpaya-

“sich kümmern” oder “saubermachen lassen” (?);

vgl. BHSD, s.v. kelāyati (“cleans up, puts in order; tends, looks after, cares for”)

☞ § 31.24, Anm. 5

§ 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati (Passiv), dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti”

§ 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati (Passiv), dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti

§ 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati (Passiv). ...”

比丘威儀法詞典

kopaka~

kopaka~

⇒ vāta-kopaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

kopana~

kopana~

⇒ vāta-kopana~

比丘威儀法詞典

kruddha-prasanna~#

kruddha-prasanna~#

“ein Zorniger und ein Wohlwollender”

§ 4.20.6A3. kruddhaprasannānāṃ (°ānaṃ [m.c.]) mukhaṃ udīkṣiyaṃ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

kṣatriya-parṣā~#

kṣatriya-parṣā~#

“Versammlung von Kṣatriyas”;

vgl. SWTF. kṣatriya-pariṣad, °ya-parṣad, Pā. khattiya-parisā; BHS. parṣā

⇒ ārya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~

§ 34.1.28A7. kṣatriyaparṣā (Hs. °paryā) dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti

§ 34.2.28B2. evan nāma kṣatriyaparṣā (Hs. °paryāye) sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti

§ 34.3.28B3. kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya upasaṃkrami-tuṃ

§ 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryante<na> upānahā{ṃ}hi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya-parṣāyam (Hs. °paryā°) upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 34.8.28B6. evaṃ kṣatriyaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5)

比丘威儀法詞典

√kṣip (1)

√kṣip (1)

“werfen”

⇒ ut-√kṣip, u-kṣipta~, ut-kṣipta~, ni-√kṣip, pra-√kṣip, prati-kṣipta~, saṃ-kṣipta~

§ 14.9.13A7. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

√kṣip (2)

kṣiva-

⇒ kṣī̆va-

比丘威儀法詞典

khaṭakhaṭāpaya-#

khaṭakhaṭāpaya-#

“klopfen” (Onomatopoeticum);

vgl. Skt. khaṭakhaṭāyate (“klopfen, knistern”)

☞ § 22.4, Anm. 4

⇒ khala khala

§ 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā (od. °vyaṃ; Hs. °vyo) kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

khaṇḍa-phuṭṭa~#

khaṇḍa-phuṭṭa~#

“Spalten und Risse”;

vgl. v. Hinüber 1969: 128 = 2009: 27

§ 16.8.14B3. vihārakāṇāṃ kālena kālaṃ khaṇḍaphuṭṭaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

garbha-rūpa~

√gal

⇒ gālaya-

比丘威儀法詞典

guḍa-pānīya~#

guḍa-pānīya~#

“Zuckerwasser”

§ 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena

§ 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

√gup

√gup

⇒ gupta~, gopaya-, pra-gopaya-

比丘威儀法詞典

gupta~

gupta~

⇒ gopayati

§ 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya

比丘威儀法詞典

gupti~

gupti~

⇒ rakṣāvaraṇa-gupti~

§ 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...}

§ 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

gṛhapati~

gṛhapati~

⇒ brāhmaṇa-gṛhapati~

比丘威儀法詞典

gṛhapati-parṣā~#

gṛhapati-parṣā~#

“Versammlung von Hausherren”;

vgl. SWTF. gṛhapati-pariṣad, °ti-parṣad, Pā. gahapati-parisā; BHS. parṣā

⇒ ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~

§ 36.1.29A7. gṛhapatiparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 36.2.29B1)

§ 36.3.29B2. evaṃ gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= § 36.8.29B6, Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, ...

§ 36.3.29B3. dīrghāyu, asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo?

§ 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

gṛhapati-mahattaraka~#

gṛhapati-mahattaraka~#

“älterer Hausherr; der würdigste Hausherr”

⇒ brāhmaṇa-mahattaraka~

§ 36.3.29B2. ye tatra gṛhapatimahattarakāḥ bhavanti, te prakṛty’ eva {te} pratisaritavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

gṛha-praveśaka~#

gṛha-praveśaka~#

“Einzug in ein Haus”

⇒ ghara-praveśaka~, ghara-praveśanika~, ghara-praveśika~

§ 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

*gṛhi-liṅga-parityāga~

*gṛhi-liṅga-parityāga~

“das Aufgeben der Kennzeichen eines Laien”;

vgl. Pā. gihi-liṅga

§ 37.5.30A4. duṣkaraṃ gṛhiliṅgaparityāgo (Hs. °liṅgāpari°), duṣkaraṃ vastisaṃyamo, duṣkaram araṇyavāso

比丘威儀法詞典

gṛhī-ālāpa~

gṛhī-ālāpa~

⇒ gṛhī̆-ālāpa~

比丘威儀法詞典

gopaya-

gopaya-

⇒ gupta~

§ 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ

§ 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti

§ 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā

比丘威儀法詞典

go-pālaka~

go-pālaka~

§ 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparindi-tavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

gomaya-piṇḍikā~#

gomaya-piṇḍikā~#

“Kuhdungklumpen”;

vgl. SWTF. gomaya-piṇḍa

§ 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya

比丘威儀法詞典

grāma-praveśanika~#

grāma-praveśanika~#

“(ein) beim Betreten des Dorfes (anzulegendes Gewand)”

⇒ grāma-praveśanaka~, grāma-praveśika~

§ 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni, vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi pratiśāmayitavyāni

§ 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi ekānte sthapetavyāni

§ 45.1.39B3. gocarāto nirddhāvitā grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ

§ 45.2.39B4. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ grāmapraveśanikāni <ni>vasanāni mārggatha

§ 45.2.39B5. grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipitvā

§ 45.4.39B5. grāmapraveśanikaṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kṛtvā

§ 46.1.40A4. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarakāni mārgganti

§ 46.2.40A5. grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā

§ 46.4.40A6. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi mārggituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

grāma-praveśika~#

grāma-praveśika~#

“(ein) beim Betreten des Dorfes (anzulegendes Gewand)”

⇒ grāma-praveśanaka~, grāma-praveśanika~

§ 41.22.35A5. tato grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā

§ 45.1.39B3. nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti

比丘威儀法詞典

glānapratyayabhaiṣajya~

glānapratyayabhaiṣajya~

⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~

比丘威儀法詞典

gh / p:

gh / p:

§ 19.16.18A5. praśvāsapaṭe für praśvāsaghaṭo

比丘威儀法詞典

gh / pr:

gh / pr:

§ 19.26.18B4. ghaṃśvato für praśvāso?

比丘威儀法詞典

cetovaśi-paramapārami-prāpta~ (SJW)

cetovaśi-paramapārami-prāpta~ (SJW)

“die höchste Vollkommenheit in der Beherrschung des eigenen Geistes erreicht habend”;

vgl. Pā. cetovasi-ppatta

☞ § 62.1, Anm. 4

§ 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti

比丘威儀法詞典

cela-paṭṭa~#

cela-paṭṭa~#

“Stoffstreifen”;

vgl.Pā. cela-paṭṭikā; Pā. cola-paṭṭa (Vin II 266, 12; Mil. 74.2, 4), Pkt. cola-paṭṭa (Ratnach, s.v.)

§ 40.5.32B6. acchehi vā celapaṭṭehi (Hs. celaṣaṭṭehi) vā bandhitavyāyo

比丘威儀法詞典

cella-parikarmman~#

cella-parikarmman~#

“das Reinigen von Stoffen/Kleidern”;

vgl. Pkt. cella < Skt. caila

☞ § 32.6, Anm. 5

§ 32.6.27B2. cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya, cellaparikarmmam (Hs. ccall°) vā karentasya, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

dāpaya-

dāpaya-

“geben” (mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f.)

⇒ √dā, dape, dāpe-

§ 4.11.5A3. oheyyakānāṃ glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ

§ 5.10.6B7. oheyyaglānakānāṃ piṇḍapāto dāpayitavyo (= § 6.10.7B7)

§ 10.5.10A5. kheṭakaṭāhaṃ niṣkāśayitavyaṃ yāvat pādodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

cora-senāpati~#

cora-senāpati~#

“der Anführer einer Diebesbande”

⇒ senāpati~

§ 41.15.34B4. yo teṣāṃ corasenāpatiḥ so gṛhasya madhyāgāre upaviṣṭaḥ

§ 41.15.34B4. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ

§ 41.15.34B5. so dāni supratyavekṣitaṃ kariya corasenāpatisya all[ī]no

§ 41.16.34B6. tenâpi dāni corasenāpatinā ... sarvvam upalakṣitaṃ

§ 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati ...

§ 41.21.35A5. anyo so corasenāpati eṣo brāhmaṇo

比丘威儀法詞典

cchatropānahā~# (°tra-upā°)

cchatropānahā~# (°tra-upā°)

“Sonnenschirm und Sandalen”

§ 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkrami-tavyaṃ

§ 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

<span style="vertical-align:super">1</span>√chad

1√chad

⇒ cchādaya-, cchāde-, prati-cchanna~, prati-cchādaya-

比丘威儀法詞典

<span style="vertical-align:super">2</span>√chad

2√chad

⇒ cchandaya-

比丘威儀法詞典

*cchanna-pradeśa~

*cchanna-pradeśa~

“abgelegener Teil (des Hauses)”

⇒ ati-gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~

§ 18.43.17A5. cchannapradeśe (Hs. °praveśe) upaveṣṭavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

cchanna-prākaṭa~#

cchāyā~

§ 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi (☞ § 1.5, Anm. 3)?

§ 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi?

§ 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... śoṣayitvā cchāyāyāṃ (Hs. cchātā°) sthāpayitavyāni

比丘威儀法詞典

j / p:

j / p:

Uddāna (V).39B2. jānīye für pānīye

比丘威儀法詞典

jaṃghā-patha~#

jaṃghā-patha~#

“Fußweg”;

vgl. Pā. jaṅgha-magga (“a footpath”, PTSD, s.v.).

§ 25.8.22B4. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe vā muṇḍavātāyane vā

比丘威儀法詞典

janapada~

janapada~

⇒ Kāśi-janapada~, vigata-janapada~

比丘威儀法詞典

√jalp

√jalp

“sagen, sprechen”;

vgl. S. 560f. in diesem Band

§ 2.9.3A2. yadi tāva jalpanti “gacchāma” ... atha dāni jalpanti “vasiṣyāma” tti (≒ § 3.10. 4A2)

§ 4.7.4B6. atha dāni te jalpanti “bhante etaṃ sidhyati ...” (≒ § 6.7.7B5)

§ 4.8.4B7. kasyacit bhikṣusya jalpitavyaṃ: “amukaṃ ...”

§ 4.11.5A3. dāyakadānapati jalpanti “paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha” tti (≒ § 5.10.6B7)

§ 8.7.9A5. asukesmi kule buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ, tato labdhaṃ

§ 12.12.11B7. atha dāni saṃghasthaviro jalpati “vihāraṃ yūyaṃ uddiśatha! ...”

§ 12.13.12A1. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha yūyaṃ eteṣāṃ ...”

§ 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante, mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ?

§ 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti

§ 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ?

§ 26.1.23A5. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā bhavati, jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāvāgu ...”

§ 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.”

§ 31.23.26A6. yadi tāva jalpati “prāpuṇati” tti, vihārako gṛhṇitavyo

§ 34.3.28B3. yadi tāva te jalpanti “bhante, mā allīyatha” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ. ... atha dāni jalpanti “allīyatha” tti, allīyitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.3.29A3, § 36.3.29B3)

§ 37.3.30A3. yadi tāva jalpanti “mā āllīyatha” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ. atha dāni jalpanti “allīyatha” tti, upasaṃkramitavyaṃ

§ 38.5.30B1. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti

§ 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti

§ 38.6.30B2. “kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? mā jalpāhi” tti

§ 38.7.30B2. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā-vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti

§ 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābhagrāh<ak>o?” yadi tāvaj jalpanti “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha”

§ 41.2.33B6. yūyaṃ jalpatha

§ 41.26.35B2. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyo{|}yo) “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho?” tti

§ 42.28.37B5. saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā bhadantā snāyantu” tti

§ 49.2.42A4. tvaṃ Nandanasya sārddhevihāriṃ jalpasi

§ 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.”

§ 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ...

§ 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti

§ 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno

比丘威儀法詞典

*jighrāpe-

jina~

§ 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ...

比丘威儀法詞典

jīvita-pariṣkāra~ (BHS, SWTF)

jīvita-pariṣkāra~ (BHS, SWTF)

“Gebrauchsgegenstand”;

vgl. Stache-Rosen 1959: 231; Pā. jīvita-parikkhāra~

⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~

§ 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tatha͡iva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi (Loc. pl.)

§ 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tatha͡iva sarvvehi jīvitapariṣkārehi (Loc. pl.)

比丘威儀法詞典

ṭapya ṭaṭapya #

ṭapya ṭaṭapya #

“geräuschvoll” (Onomatopoeticum)

§ 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha-caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti

比丘威儀法詞典

*ṭhapaya-

*ṭhapaya-

“legen”;

vgl. Pā = BHS. ṭhapeti

§ 41.5.34A2. ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti (Hs. paṭhay°), nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti

比丘威儀法詞典

taṃ pi #

taṃ pi #

“jedoch”;

< Skt. tad api

⇒ evaṃ pi

§ 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ

§ 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati

§ 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

tapta~

tapta~

⇒ tatta~

§ 42.2.36A3. praviśantu āyuṣmanto, jentāko tapto

比丘威儀法詞典

tarpaṇa~

tarpaṇa~

“Erfrischung”

⇒ eka-bhakta-tarpaṇa~

§ 31.18.26A2. kasya śuve bhaktaṃ tarpaṇaṃ purobhaktikaṃ vā?

比丘威儀法詞典

tarpaṇāgra~# (°paṇa-agra)

tarpaṇāgra~# (°paṇa-agra)

“die Halle für Erfrischungen”

☞ § 11.10, Anm. 2

⇒ agra~ (2), bhaktāgra~

§ 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ

§ 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre ta{pa}rpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa-upānahena niṣīdituṃ

§ 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi-prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ

§ 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭena auddhatyā<bhi>prāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ

§ 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā samāvāyikānāṃ vā ... kaṇḍūyituṃ

§ 60.5.48B6. atha dāni bhikṣu bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, ...

§ 61.6.49A5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā ... aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ

§ 62.8.50A4. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa vātakarmma karttuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

tāpita-mudrita~#

tāmra-pātra~

“kupferne Schale”

§ 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

tīrthika-parṣā~#

tīrthika-parṣā~#

“Versammlung von Angehörigen anderer Sekten”

⇒ ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~

§ 37.1.29B7. tīrthikaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 37.2.30A1)

§ 37.3.30A2. evaṃ tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= § 37.7.30A5, Uddāna [IV].30B5)

§ 37.3.30A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gatāgatasya tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ

§ 37.3.30A2. āyuṣmaṃ, asti me kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ, āllīyāma mā āllīyāmo vā?tu

§ 4.17.5B5. vidhinā devalokaṃ (Hs. °lokas; vgl. § 4.17, Anm. 3) tu modantu kāmakāmino (vs)

§ 41.19.35A2. ācāraguṇasampannāḥ ye bhavanti tu mānavāḥ / labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ ... // (vs)

§ 36.6.29B5. sāgārās tu (“fürwahr”?; ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 5; Hs. sāgārāṣṭraṃ) ’nagārāṇāṃ saṃprayacchanti dakṣiṇāṃ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

√tṛp

√tṛp

⇒ saṃ-tarpita~

比丘威儀法詞典

tṛ-pādaka~#

tṛ-pādaka~#

“Dreifuß”;

vgl. Skt. tripāda (“dreifüssiges Gestell”)

☞ § 23.4.1, Anm. 5

§ 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhi-tavyā

§ 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

tṛ-puṭa~#

tṛ-puṭa~#

⇒ puṭa~

比丘威儀法詞典

te (Acc. pl. masc.; vgl. BHSG §§ 21.30~31)

te (Acc. pl. masc.; vgl. BHSG §§ 21.30~31)

⇒ tad~

比丘威儀法詞典

ty / tp

ty / tp

⇒ tp / ty

比丘威儀法詞典

tyāga-sampanna~#

tyāga-sampanna~#

“freigebig”

§ 4.17.5B5. śīlavāṃ tyāgasampanno samyagdṛṣṭi ca yo iha (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

√trap

√trap

⇒ o-trapa-

比丘威儀法詞典

dahāpaya- (BHS[Mvu]; BHSG § 38.53, S. 215a, s.v. dah)

dahāpaya- (BHS[Mvu]; BHSG § 38.53, S. 215a, s.v. dah)

“verbrennen lassen”;

Kaus. von Skt. √dah; vgl. Pā. dahāpeti (Vin IV 33.23; DP I 262b)

⇒ √dah

§ 14.6.13A5. kakṣaṃ ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

danta-poṇa~ (BHS[BHSD, s.v. poṇa], Pā)

danta-poṇa~ (BHS[BHSD, s.v. poṇa], Pā)

“Zahnreinigungsmittel”

< Skt. danta-pavana

danta-pavana ⇒ danta-kāṣṭha~

§ 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo ... uddhṛtavyo ... uddhṛtavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

dape- (BHS, Pā)

dape- (BHS, Pā)

“geben”;

BHSG § 38.52, S. 215b, dā (8) -dape-ti

⇒ dāpe-, dāpaya-, daya- (1)

§ 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ

§ 9.1.9B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto Nand<an>Opanandano ṣaḍvarggikā ca niśrayaṃ dapiya na͡iva antevāsi ovadanti, na anuśāsanti

比丘威儀法詞典

darśana-patha~

darśana-patha~

“Gesichtsfeld”

☞ § 34.5, Anm. 1

⇒ a-darśanapathe, darśana-śravaṇa-patha~, darśanopacāra~, darśanopavicāra~

§ 34.5.28B4. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4)

比丘威儀法詞典

darśana-śravaṇa-patha~#

darśana-śravaṇa-patha~#

“Sicht- und Hörweite”

§ 51.4.44A2. nâpi <kṣamati> adarśanapathe sthātuṃ. atha khalu ud<d>eśe sthātavyaṃ darśanaśravaṇapathe

比丘威儀法詞典

darśanopacāra~# (darśana-upa°)

darśanopacāra~# (darśana-upa°)

“Sichtweite”;

vgl. Pā. dassanūpacāra (Vin II 20.19, III 93.29, 105.20)

⇒ a-darśanapathe, darśanopavicāra~, darśana-patha~

§ 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ. nâpi dāni darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.4.29A4)

§ 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā. nâpi darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

darśanopavicāra~# (darśana-upa°)

darśanopavicāra~# (darśana-upa°)

“Sichtweite”;

vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 234.8A8.7~8B8.1; BhiKaVā 15a5 (Schmidt 1993: 252.8)

⇒ a-darśanapathe, darśanopacāra~, darśana-patha~

§ 52.3.44B2. atha khalu darśanopavicāre āsitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

dāyaka-dānapati~#

dāraka~

⇒ dāraka-dārikā~

§ 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā

§ 41.13.34B3. taṃ dāra<ka>ṃ rakṣapālaṃ thapiyāṇaṃ

§ 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... (= § 41.15.34B5)

§ 41.14.34B3. so eko dārako dṛṣṭo

§ 41.14.34B4. dāraka kahiṃ tumhāṇaṃ hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇaṃ vā?

§ 41.15.34B5. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ tasya dārakasyâha “haṃgho dāraka, pipāsito ’smi. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ.”

§ 41.16.34B6. tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya ...

§ 41.16.34B6. so dāni pṛcchati “haṃgho dāraka, kasya kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si?”

§ 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya-suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, ...

§ 41.18.35A1. ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo

§ 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha “haṃgho dārakā (Voc. sg.), imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi.”

§ 41.18.35A2. tena dārakena dvārāṇi sarvvāṇi ghaṭitāni

比丘威儀法詞典

divā-poṣadha~#

divā-poṣadha~#

“Poṣadha-Feier am Tage”

⇒ poṣadha~, rātri-poṣadha~

§ 2.5.2B4. kiṃ rātripoṣadho bhaviṣyati divāpoṣadho purebhaktaṃ bhaviṣyati paścād-bhaktaṃ?

比丘威儀法詞典

√dīp

√dīp

⇒ dīpaya-, dīpya-, ā-√dīp, ā-dīpaya-, ā-dīpe-

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpa~

dīpa~

“Lampe”

⇒ dīpaka~, dīpikā~ (1), pradīpa~

§ 8.12.9B2. dīpo prajvālayitavyo, kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ

§ 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo

§ 23.6.2.21B3. mandamukhīm vā prajvāleti, anāpattiḥ. dīpaṃ vā praveśeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ

§ 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno

§ 53.1.45A2. tena hi dīpo nāma karttavyo

§ 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti

§ 53.3.45A3. evaṃ dīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 53.20.45B7)

§ 53.5.45A4~5. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra-kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo

§ 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti

§ 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, ... so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti

§ 53.10.45B1. nâpi kṣamati tena upārambhaṇābhiprāyeṇa dīpo vārayituṃ

§ 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ

§ 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ

§ 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo

§ 53.13.45B3. varccakuṭīyaṃ nirvvāpayitvā, racchā<yāṃ> dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo

§ 53.13.45B4. sopānaśīrṣe nirvvāpayitvā prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo

§ 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti

§ 53.16.45B5. tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo

§ 53.17.45B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, dīpo praveśīyatî”ti. “dīpo praveśayati” tti

§ 53.19.45B7. evaṃ devasikaṃ dīpo jvālayitavyo usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpaka~

dīpaya-

“erstrahlen lassen”

⇒ dīpya-

§ 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi?

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpa-vartti~

dīpa-vartti~

“Docht”

⇒ dīpa-varttikā~

§ 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile nirvvāpayitavyaṃ

§ 53.15.45B5. yadi dīpavartti dagdhikā bhavati, palikhāṭir vvā okaḍḍhitavyo

§ 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpa-varttikā~#

dīpa-varttikā~#

“Lampendocht”

⇒ dīpa-vartti~

§ 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpa-vārika~

dīpa-vārika~

“Lampenwart”

⇒ vārika~

§ 53.2.45A2. āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā dīpavārikā

§ 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ pratijāgrīyati, dīpa-vārikā (Hs. °cāri°) uddiśitavyā ...

§ 53.5.45A4. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra-kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo

§ 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti

§ 53.10.45B1. tehi dīpavārikehi (Hs. °cāri°) na kṣamati āghāto vā pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ

§ 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpikā~ (1)

dīpikā~ (1)

“Lampe”

⇒ dīpa~, dīpaka~, pradīpa~

§ 41.14.34B3. te dāni ulkāyo ca dīpikāyo ca prajvāliyāṇaṃ mārgganti

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpikā~# (2)

dīpikā~# (2)

“Termite”;

< *udīpikā < (Metathese) Skt. upadīkā (“Termite”)

☞ § 13.2, Anm. 3

⇒ dvīpikā

§ 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā

比丘威儀法詞典

dīpya-

dīpya-

⇒ dīpaya-, ā-√dīp

§ 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno

比丘威儀法詞典

duḥkhaṃ-nirodha-gāminī-pratipad~#

duḥkhaṃ-nirodha-gāminī-pratipad~#

“Pfad, der zur Vernichtung des Leidens führt”;

vgl. BHSD s.vv. āryasatya, pratipad

☞ § 41.10, Anm. 4

§ 41.10.34A7. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni, ... duḥkhaṃnirodhagāminīpratipadam āryasatyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

duḥkhāpaya- (BHS[Mvu])

duḥkhāpaya- (BHS[Mvu])

“belästigen”;

vgl. Pā. dukkhāpeti

⇒ duḥkha-, duḥkhāya-

§ 32.10.27B4. atha khalu tathā vanditavyaṃ, yathā na duḥkhāpiye (Passiv, Opt.) pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs)

比丘威儀法詞典

dṛṣṭa-parākrama~#

dṛṣṭa-parākrama~#

“die Macht gezeigt habend”

☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1

§ 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... āvarjayitvā Aṅga-Magadha-...-Avanti, jñāne dṛṣṭaparākramo ...

比丘威儀法詞典

devānukampita~# (deva-anu°)

deśa~

§ 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ?

§ 5.5.6B2. katamasmin deśe gṛhaṃ?

§ 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye?

§ 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako

比丘威儀法詞典

dvīpikā~#

dvīpikā~#

“Termite”;

∈ *(u)dīpikā < (Metathese) Skt. upadīkā (“Termite”); vgl. BHS. dvīpika

☞ § 13.2, Anm. 3

⇒ dīpikā~ (2)

§ 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... dvārā dvīpikāhi khajjantāṃ (Hs. °nto)

§ 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... dvā<rā> dvīpikāhi khajjantā

比丘威儀法詞典

dh / p:

dh / p:

§ 42.7.36B2. vātadhānīye für vātapānīye

比丘威儀法詞典

dhana-dhānya-priya~#

dhana-dhānya-priya~#

“Geld, Getreide und was einem lieb ist”

§ 4.20.6A2. dhanadhānyapriyāṇi vā devabhāvaṃ vā manuṣyam vā (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

Dhara-pānīya~#

Dhara-pānīya~#

“Wasser aus Dhara”

☞ § 40.8, Anm. 5

§ 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Śākete Dharapānīyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

Dharmma-pada~ (BHS, SWTF)

Dharmma-pada~ (BHS, SWTF)

§ 41.20.35A4. bhagavān etasmin vastuni Dharmmapadaṃ bhāṣate

比丘威儀法詞典

dhopaya-#

dhova- (BHS[Mvu, Śikṣ(Bhikṣu-prakīrṇaka der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins), Mmk], Pā)

“waschen”;

vgl. Skt. dhāvati, dhāvayati

⇒ dhovaya-, dhove-, su-dhovitvā, dhopaya-

§ 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6)

§ 3.7.3B5. vibhavo bhavati śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyā puṣpehi okiritavyā

§ 8.5.9A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam āsiñcitavyaṃ

§ 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ (Hs. vodhi°), kālena kālaṃ sivitavyaṃ

§ 12.7.11B4. śayyāsanaṃ bhavati omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhoviya sīvitavyaṃ

§ 12.18.12A5. kālena kālaṃ śayyāsanaṃ sīvitavyaṃ dhovitavyaṃ (Hs. vodhi°)

§ 13.12.12B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ rañjayitavyaṃ

§ 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā, dhovitvā (Hs. °tva) sivitavyā, pratyaggalāni dātavyāni

§ 16.6.14B1. (śeyyāsanaṃ ...) dhoviṣyanti rañjiṣyanti sīviṣyanti

§ 16.8.14B3. śeyyāsanaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sivitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ

§ 17.10.15A5. anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ, anyehi dhovayitavyaṃ (Hs. vodhayi°)

§ 18.8.15B7. tena tāni kuṇḍakāni ... kālena kālaṃ dhovayitavyā<ni>

§ 19.5.17B6. (Das Pissoir) dhoviya tailena mrakṣayitavyā

§ 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya (Hs. vodhiya) pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 19.25.18B3. mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 18.4.15B3. ullā varccagharaṃ dhovanti (< dhovantī; p. präs, Nom. sg. fem.; Hs. vovatti)

§ 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ)

§ 19.33.18B6. atha dāni kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovitavyā

§ 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ, dhoviyāṇaṃ thapayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo)

§ 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ astariyāṇaṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ...

§ 23.4.3.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastāṃ dhovituṃ, mukhaṃ dhovituṃ

§ 23.6.4.21B3. nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastām vā nirmmādayituṃ

§ 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati

§ 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... pādaṃ vā mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ

§ 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā ... mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ...

§ 26.9.23B2. na͡iva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, na hastā nirmmādayati, ...

§ 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.21.26A5. yadi tāva ācikṣanti pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ

§ 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ

§ 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ...

§ 32.6.27B2. pādāṃ dhovantasya, hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, ...

§ 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī otāriyāṇaṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ (Hs. vodhiyāṇaṃ) sthāne sthapayitavyā

§ 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo

§ 40.1.32B2. pātrapariśrāvaṇāni dhovanti

§ 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti

§ 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ

§ 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto ... pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ

§ 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ

§ 40.16.33B2. tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati

§ 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ...

§ 41.1.33B3. mātrāye yūyam āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha

§ 41.2.33B5. jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya ...

§ 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha

§ 41.3.33B6. evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1)

§ 41.3.33B7. evaṃ bhikṣavo pādāṃ dhovatha

§ 41.6.34A3. pādāṃ dhovati

§ 41.7.34A4. vāmena hastena pādāṃ dhovati

§ 41.7.34A4. sthavireṇa dāni vāmā jaṃghā dhovitā, dakṣiṇā jaṃghā dhovitā, vāmo pādo dhovito, dakṣiṇo pādo dhovito

§ 41.9.34A5. dakṣiṇena hastena upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ

§ 41.9.34A5. hastāṃ dhoviya dakānakaṃ dhoviya ...

§ 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpīḍitvā ...

§ 41.23.35A7. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ

§ 41.23.35A7. vāmena hastena pādā{ṃ} dhovitavyā

§ 41.23.35A7. vāmā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.27.35B4)

§ 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.28.35B5)

§ 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ (Hs. °āyocch°) dhovitavyaṃ

§ 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā

§ 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā jhallajhallāye pādāṃ dhovituṃ

§ 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti

§ 41.26.35B3. tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti

§ 41.27.35B3. vāmena hastena pādā dhovitavyā

§ 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇā (Hs. dakṣiṇena) jaṃghā dhovitavyā

§ 41.27.35B4. vāmo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5)

§ 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5)

§ 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇena hastena pādā dhovitavyā

§ 41.28.35B5. ekena dhovitavyaṃ

§ 41.28.35B5. vāmā jaṃghā dhovitavyā

§ 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano dhoviya pīḍiya tatra͡iva sthapitavyaṃ

§ 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ

§ 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādehi dhovitehi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ

§ 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti bhūyo dhovitavyā

§ 41.32.36A1. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, bhikṣuḥ paśyati “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti

§ 42.11.36B5. jentāke pīṭhikā vā śuktikāyo vā dhovitavyā

§ 42.31.37B7. jentākapīṭhikāni (lies: °pīṭhakāni?) dhoviya praveśayitavyāni

§ 42.31.37B7. śuktiyo dhoviya praveśayitavyāyo

§ 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā

§ 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ dhoviya vihārakoṇake <tha>payitavyo

§ 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi

§ 47.2.40B5. cīvarakāni dhovaṃtā sīvantā rañjentā ... (= § 48.2.41A6)

§ 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... karddamena vā vināśitaṃ bhavati dhovitavyaṃ

§ 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka karddamena vā vināśitaṃ bhavati, dhovitavyaṃ

§ 51.12.44A6. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ hastāṃ dhovati, ...

§ 56.7.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ

§ 57.11.48A1. nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

<span style="vertical-align:super">2</span>√dhāv

2√dhāv

⇒ dhota~, dhopaya-, dhova-, dhovaya-, dhovita-pāda~, su-dhota~

比丘威儀法詞典

dhūpa~

dhūpa~

“der beim Verbrennen von Räucherwerk aufsteigende Rauch”

☞ § 32.6, Anm. 6

⇒ dhūma~

§ 32.6.27B2. dhūpam vā pibantasya, akṣiṇī vā añjantasya, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

dhūpe- (Pā)

dhūpe- (Pā)

“ausräuchern”;

vgl. DP, s.v. dhūpeti2; Skt. dhūmāyati

§ 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... dhūpetavyo kuṣṭhena bhurjena vā saktuhi vā

比丘威儀法詞典

na câpi

na câpi

§ 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

nagara-kulopaka~ (kula-upa°)#

nagara-kulopaka~ (kula-upa°)#

“(bestimmte) Familien in der Stadt (um Almosen) aufsuchend; in (bestimmten) Familien in der Stadt verkehrend(er Mönch)”;

vgl. BHS. kulopaka (BHSD, s.v. upaka); Pā. kulūpaka

§ 49.1.42A3. snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo ... yathâpi dāni nagarakulopakena pitr̥̄yakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya

比丘威儀法詞典

nagna-prāvṛta~#

nagna-prāvṛta~#

“nackt, ohne Bekleidung”

§ 45.1.39B3. te ... nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti ... nagnaprāvṛtā vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni mārgganti

§ 45.2.39B4. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ grāmapraveśanikāni <ni>vasanāni mārggatha

§ 45.2.39B5. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ vihāracara<ṇa>kāni ni{r}vāsanāni mārggatha

§ 45.7.40A2. nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇa<ṃ> nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

NandOpanandanā~ (Nanda-Upa°)

naya-

⇒ nāpaya-, apa-√nī, ā-√nī, un-nīya-, upa-ne-, pra-ṇetavya~, vi-naya-, sam-ud-ā-naya-

§ 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ, pustako nayitavyo, kuṇḍikā nayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

*nava-pratipanna~

*nava-pratipanna~

“einer, der gerade in den Orden eingetreten ist” (wörtl. “neu eingetreten”)

☞ § 42.18, Anm. 2

§ 42.18.37A3. na snāne navapratipannena (Hs. navāprati°) vā parikarmma karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

nāpaya-#

nāpaya-#

“bringen lassen”;

Kausativ von Skt. √nī; vgl. BHS. ā-nāpaya-, ā-nāpe- (BHSG § 38.54, S. 219a), Pā. ā-nāpeti

§ 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ nāpayitavyāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

nâpi

nâpi

⇒ nâpi dāni

§ 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ

§ 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ

§ 20.14.20A1. nâpi kṣamati ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ (= § 20.14.20A2)

§ 42.30.37B6. nâpi kṣamati ... snāyituṃ

§ 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati ... sthapayituṃ

§ 44.6.39A4. nâpi kṣamati ... acchituṃ

§ 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati ... sthāpayituṃ

§ 45.5.39B6. nâpi kṣamati ... nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ et passim

比丘威儀法詞典

nâpi dāni

nâpi dāni

§ 1.8.1B6. nâpi dāni “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ

§ 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ

§ 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 18.19.16A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ

§ 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgam pradeśe ujjhituṃ

§ 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... cchorayituṃ ... cchorayituṃ

§ 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā

§ 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “ko itthaṃ? kativarṣo? utthiha!”

§ 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ

§ 41.27.35B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati tena͡iva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ

§ 41.31.35B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... āsituṃ

§ 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... caṃkramituṃ

§ 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati

§ 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ

§ 42.29.37B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... snāyituṃ

§ 43.11.38A7. nâpi dāni kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā oddriṇṇakā vā ...usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

*nitya-pacana~

nidāna~ (BHS, SWTF)

“Einleitung(ssätze)”

☞ § 1.1, Anm. 1 zu vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā

§ 1.1.1B1. vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 4.1.4A5, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4, § 7.1.8A5, § 13.1.12A6, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 48.1.41A2 usw.)

比丘威儀法詞典

*ni-dhāpa-

*ni-dhāpa-

“hinausgehen”;

∈ Skt. nir-dhāvati

☞ § 22.3, Anm. 1

⇒ nid-dhāva-, ni-dhāva-, nir-dhāpa-

§ 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa (Hs. nivāp°) cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ (Hs. osāritavyaṃ)

比丘威儀法詞典

ni-√pat

ni-√pat

§ 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya (Hs. niyat°)

§ 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā

比丘威儀法詞典

nipātin~

nimantritaka~#

“eingeladen”;

< nimantrita + Suffix ka

§ 26.3.23A7. nimantritakā vā bhavanti, tehi nimantritakehi gantavyaṃ

§ 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ jñātiśāle nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ

§ 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ

§ 42.24.37B2. nimantritakānāṃ bhavati, nimant<r>itakehi gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

nirodha-samāpatti~ (BHS, SWTF)

nirodha-samāpatti~ (BHS, SWTF)

“die Erreichung der Aufhebung (des Leidens)”

§ 41.31.35B7. na ... kṣamati ... middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

nir-dhāpa-#

nir-dhāpa-#

“hinausgehen”;

Hypersanskritismus für Skt. nir-1√dhāv (“herauslaufen”)

☞ § 22.3, Anm. 1

⇒ nid-dhāva-, nir-dhāva-, ni-dhāva-, *ud-dhāpaya

§ 41.18.35A2. te dāni corā nirddhāpitāḥ

§ 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati (Passiv mit medialer Bedeutung?)

§ 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

srotāpatti-phala~ (srota-āp°) (BHS)

srotāpatti-phala~ (srota-āp°) (BHS)

“die Frucht des Stromeintrittes”

§ 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatra͡iva sthāne sthitena srotāpattiphalaṃ (Hs. śro°) sākṣāt kṛtaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

p / y

p / y

⇒ allīpa- für allīya-, āllīpa- für āllīya-, lp / ly, pyeva / yyeva

§ 11.5.10B6. ohapiyante für ohayi°;

§ 12.3.11B1. ohapiyantāṃ für ohayi° (= § 17.3. 14B6);

§ 12.6.11B3. ohapiyanti für ohayi°;

§ 17.12.15A6. ohapiyanti für ohayi°

§ 7.1.8A6. dhipa für viya

§ 8.13.9B3. pattikāṃ für yatti°

§ 14.12.13B2. pratisaṃskāroyetavyā für °kārāpetavyā

§ 17.2.14B5. ullāpe für ullāye (= § 23.1.21A4, § 23.8.21B6)

§ 18.4.15B3. niyateya für nipateya

§ 18.29.16B5. ūrūpo für ūrūyo (= § 18.33.16B6, § 19.13.18A4)

§ 18.45.17A6. yatthesmiṃ für panthesmiṃ;

§ 18.45.17A6. yatthesmi für panthesmi

§ 18.51.17B1. upathayitavyā für upathapi°

§ 18.53.17B3. amanāyaṃ für °āpaṃ

§ 19.4.17B6. yatako für pa<ti>tako

§ 23.3.21A6. ullāpo für ulloyo (zweimal)

§ 25.5.22B3. yatitaṃ für pat°

§ 31.19.26A3. tāpe ārthāpe für tāye ārthāye

§ 34.3.28B3. allipitavyā für alliyi°

§ 34.5.28B5. kṣipādharmmam für kṣiyā° (= § 37.4.30A3)

§ 36.8.29B6. gṛhapatiyathā für °patiparṣā

§ 39.21.32A1. thātoyaliptāṃ für dhotôpaliptāṃ

☞ § 39.21(Text), Anm. 1

§ 39.29.32A6. yaṃsetavyā für paṃs°

§ 40.10.33A3. yatraśākhāya für patraśākhāya

§ 40.11.33A4. yātavyaṃ für pātavyaṃ

§ 40.16.33B1. snāpituṃ für snāyituṃ (?)

§ 41.6.34A3. upānahā-yocchanno für u°-pocchano

§ 41.8.34A4. upānahā-yocchana-nattakaṃ für u°-pocchana-n°

§ 41.8.34A4. yocchito für p°

§ 41.8.34A4. yocchitaṃ für p°

§ 41.9.34A5 upānahā-yocchanakaṃ für upānahā-pocchanakaṃ (= § 41.24.35B1)

§ 41.16.34B6. dīyamūlaṃ für dīpamūlaṃ

§ 41.29.35B6. athātā yāṃ für adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ

§ 42.13.36B6. yathāyo für parṣāye|(Daṇḍa)

§ 42.25.37B3. snāpitukāmo für snāyitukāmo (?)

§ 48.1.41A3. māyāśrayā für sâpāśrayā

§ 62.2.49B5. kalāpā für kalāyā oder kalāyaṃ

§ 62.2.49B6. jighrāyenti für °āpenti

比丘威儀法詞典

p / v:

p / v:

§ 28.8.24A4. anuvarivarttantena für anupariv°

§ 42.20.37A5. paṭṭiya für vaṭṭiya

比丘威儀法詞典

-p- > -v-

-p- > -v-

⇒ sthave- (< sthapayati)

比丘威儀法詞典

-p- &lt; -v-

-p- < -v-

⇒ nir-ddhāpa- (< nir-1√dhāv), *ud-dhāpaya-(< *ud-dhāvaya-)

比丘威儀法詞典

p / ṣ:

pakka-kheṭa~#

“eingetrockneter Schleim”;

< pakva (“fest, eingetrocknet”) + kheṭa

☞ § 24.1, Anm.2

§ 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi

§ 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakkasiṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi?

比丘威儀法詞典

pakka-siṃghāṇaka~#

pakka-siṃghāṇaka~#

“eingetrockneter Nasenschleim”;

< pakva + siṃghāṇaka

☞ § 24.1, Anm. 2

§ 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi

§ 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakkasiṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi?

比丘威儀法詞典

pakva~

pakva~

“reif”

§ 25.4.22B3. nâpi kṣamati bilvasya vā pakvasya kapitthasya pakvasya nālikerasya heṣṭhe nirmmādayituṃ, mā pakvena vā bilvena pakvena vā kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya tti

比丘威儀法詞典

pakviṭṭikā~#

pakviṭṭikā~#

“gebrannter Ziegel, Backstein”;

< pakva + iṣṭikā;

vgl. Skt. pakveṣṭakā

§ 42.7.36B2. bhūmi astaritavyā upalehi vā pakviṭṭikāya (Hs. pakṣiṭṭikāya) vā

比丘威儀法詞典

pakṣa~

pakṣin~

§ 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi (Inst. pl.) ohayiyantaṃ

§ 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... pakṣīhi vā oh<ay>iyantaṃ

§ 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati, pakṣīhi ohayiyate

§ 21.8.20B5. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... pakṣīhi vā ohayiyantaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

√pac

√pac

⇒ pātra-pāka~

§ 4.7.4B5. “bhikṣusaṃgho tena nimantrito. kiṃ sidhyati vā pacyati vā?” ... “kasya bhaktaṃ? kasya sidhyati? kasya pacyatî?”ti

§ 5.6.6B3. jānāhi kiṃ sidhyati, kiṃ pacyati

§ 5.7.6B4. kiṃ sidhyati vā kiṃ pacyati vā? ... na sidhyati na pacyati

§ 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati (≒ § 6.7.7B5)

§ 25.16.23A3. pātraṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ dahitavyaṃ pacitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ (☞ § 25.16, Anm. 2)

§ 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ. “āyuṣman, kiṃ sidhyati? kiṃ pacyati? kiṃ bhaktakānāṃ sthitikā?”

§ 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ...

§ 39.5.31A3. grāmāntike śeyyāsane bhaktam pacyati

比丘威儀法詞典

pacana~

pacana~

⇒ nitya-pacana~

比丘威儀法詞典

pañca~

pañca~

⇒ ṣaṭ-pañca~

§ 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi (☞ § 1.6, Anm. 1) vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni

§ 7.4.8B1~2. ekato vinayaṃ na pārayati, pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. pañca sūtrāṇi na pārayati, catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ ... (≒ § 9.4.10A1)

§ 11.1.10B1. pañcârthavaśāṃ (= § 15.1.13B7, § 21.1.20A6, § 43.1.38A1 usw.)

§ 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ ... katamehi pañcahi? ... imehi pañcahi

§ 12.15.12A2. caturṇṇāṃ pañcānām vā janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

pañcadaśī~

pañcadaśī~

§ 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī

比丘威儀法詞典

pañcadhā

pañcadhā

§ 4.20.6A2. pañcadhā (Hs. °dho) manasi priyaṃ (Hs. prīyan) (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pañcama~

pañcama~

§ 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti

Uddāna (V).39B3. pañcamo varggaḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

pañcavarṣika~ (BHS)

pañcavarṣika~ (BHS)

“Pañcavarṣika-Fest”

§ 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (Hs. yathā pāṭito)”

§ 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> pañcavarṣika <pravṛttaṃ> ... (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti

比丘威儀法詞典

pañcāha~ (°ñca-aha)

pañcāha~ (°ñca-aha)

§ 13.14.12B6. pañcāhe pañcāhe śayyāsanaṃ pratyotāpetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paṃcāha-vārika~#

paṃcāha-vārika~#

“ein Mönch, der fünf Tage lang Dienst hat”

⇒ daśāha-vārika~, pakṣa-vārika~, māsa-vārika~, vārika~

§ 43.3.38A3. māsavāriko vā daśāhavāriko vā tatra uddiśitavyo paṃcāhavāriko vā

比丘威儀法詞典

pañcāhika~ (BHS[Mvu])

pañcāhika~ (BHS[Mvu])

“jeden fünften Tag stattfindend”

§ 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1.10B3, § 12.1.11A6)

§ 11.2.10B3. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto ... (= § 12.2.11A6, § 13.2.12A6, § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5, § 21.2.20A7, § 24.1.21B7, § 43.1.38A1; ≒ § 23.1.21A4)

比丘威儀法詞典

<span style="vertical-align:super">1</span>√paṭ

1√paṭ

⇒ pāṭaya-, pāṭita~, pāṭita-vipāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~

比丘威儀法詞典

<span style="vertical-align:super">2</span>√paṭ (&lt; Skt. √pat)

2√paṭ (< Skt. √pat)

⇒ ā-paṭita~, up-paṭa

比丘威儀法詞典

paṭa~(BHS, SWTF)

paṭa~(BHS, SWTF)

“Stoff”

§ 48.5.41B1. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā kalantarako paṭa vā, tato niṣīditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paṭaka~

paṭalaka~

“Körbchen”

§ 43.1.38A2. ... māṇikaṃ caṃgeriyo śuṣyāyo paṭalakā{ṃ}

比丘威儀法詞典

paṭikā~

paṭikā~

“Stoffstreifen”

⇒ paṭtikā~

比丘威儀法詞典

paṭiccha- (Pā)

paṭiccha- (Pā)

“annehmen”;

< Skt. prati-√iṣ

⇒ praticcha-, pratīccha-

§ 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paṭipaṭikā~#

paṭipaṭikā~#

“Reihe”

☞ § 18.8. Anm. 1

⇒ paṭipāṭikā~

§ 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti

§ 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya

比丘威儀法詞典

paṭipāṭikā~ (BHS)

paṇḍaka~

“Einer, der mit einem (psychischen oder physischen) sexuellen Defekt versehen ist; ein Impotenter”

☞ § 8.7, Anm. 5

§ 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye

§ 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ...) asukāye caṇḍavidhavāye dinnaṃ. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

paṇḍara-vipāṇḍara~#

paṇḍara-vipāṇḍara~#

“ganz weiß”;

vgl. Skt. pāṇḍara~, Pā. paṇḍara

§ 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}-vipāṇḍaraṃ (eine Verschreibung von pāṭita-vipāṭitam “zerrissen”?) apāśrayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paṇḍita~

paṇḍita~

§ 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

√pat

√pat

⇒ ā-paṭita~, up-paṭa-, patitaka~, pātaya-, saṃ-ni-√pat, *saṃpatitaka~

§ 18.7.15B6. kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ

§ 25.5.22B3. nâpi kṣamati dariniśritena vā pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ, mā patitaṃ bhañjeya tti

§ 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti

§ 44.1.38B6~7. sa cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ patito. evaṃ bhūmīye patito (Nom. sg. neut.)

§ 44.6.39A4. ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

patānī~

patānī~

⇒ dāna-patānī~

比丘威儀法詞典

patitaka~ (Pā)

pattī~ (< Skt. patnī)

⇒ dāna-pattī~

比丘威儀法詞典

patthaliddrakā̆~#

patra~

“Blätter”

§ 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena oṣṭhā pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacārikāye) pātraṃ (wohl für patraṃ) bandhitavyaṃ

§ 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... vikṣuṇṇam vā pātraṃ (wohl für patraṃ) gṛhṇituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

patra-rasa~#

patra-rasa~#

“Saft von Blättern”

§ 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

patra-śākhā~#

patra-śākhā~#

“Blätter und Zweige”

§ 40.10.33A3. prakṣālayitvā patraśākhāya (Hs. yatraś°) vā <nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ>

§ 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ

§ 40.15.33A6. bhājanāni patraśākhāhi (Hs. yatraś°) sthapitavyāni

§ 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> prasphoṭitvā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

patrāntarikā~# (patra-an°)

patha~

⇒ jaṃghā-patha~, darśana-patha~, darśana-śravaṇa-patha~, vāta-patha~

比丘威儀法詞典

pathikā~

pathikā~

⇒ śiva-pathikā~

比丘威儀法詞典

pathy-adana~ (Skt)

pathy-adana~ (Skt)

“Wegzehrung”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v.

§ 31.37.27A3. teṣāṃ gacchamānānāṃ pathyadanena vaikalpaṃ karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

√pad

√pad

⇒ ā-√pad, ut-padya-, ut-pādaya-, upa-saṃ-pāde-, nava-pratipanna~, prati-padya-, pratipanna~, sam-ā-panna~, saṃ-pādaya

比丘威儀法詞典

pada~

pantha~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā)

“Weg”;

vgl. Skt. panthan

⇒ adhvan~, mārgga~

§ 18.45.17A6. nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ (Hs. yatthe°) uśvāsaṃ karttuṃ

§ 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃhi panthesmi (Hs. yatthe°) antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?”

§ 19.37.19A1. nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ

§ 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ?

§ 19.37.19A2. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ

§ 49.7.42B6. panthe paśyati, panthāto nivarttitavyaṃ

§ 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ. yatra yeva taṃ paśyati, tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuñjitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

parāṅ-mukhena

parāṅ-mukhena

“mit abgewandtem Gesicht”

§ 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ. tena ca parāṅmukhena upaviśitavyaṃ antaraṃ dātavyaḥ

§ 18.44.17A5. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena purato parāṅmukhena sthātavyaṃ

§ 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena

比丘威儀法詞典

parā-√mṛś

parā-√mṛś

§ 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena parā{ṃ}mṛśiyāṇa jānitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

parāhṇa~

parāhṇa~

⇒ *atiparahṇe

比丘威儀法詞典

pari / prati

pari / prati

⇒ kiṃkara-pariśrāvaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

parikathā

parikathā

“Predigt”

☞ § 1.2, Anm. 2

§ 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati, na parikathāṃ karoti

§ 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B7, § 3.8.3B6)

§ 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi”

§ 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi (Hs. °yasi)

§ 2.9.3A2. parikathā karttavyā

§ 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi”

§ 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa saṃkṣiptena dakṣiṇām ādiśiya na parikathāṃ karoti

§ 4.13.5A7. parikathā karttavyā, dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā

§ 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno

比丘威儀法詞典

parikarmma

parikarmma

“herum, rund” (?)

⇒ abhyantara-parikarmma

比丘威儀法詞典

parikarmman~

parigraha~

§ 4.18.5B7. śirīyĕ lakṣmī<yĕ>(?) parigraheṇa ca (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-ghaṭṭa-#

pari-ghaṭṭa-#

“verriegeln”

☞ § 40.1, Anm. 3

§ 40.1.32B2. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ parighaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ kariya gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

paricaryā~

paricaryā~

⇒ kāya-paricaryā~

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-jānā- (pari-√jñā)

pari-jānā- (pari-√jñā)

§ 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne (Opt.) “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

parijñātaka~#

parijñātaka~#

“bekannt”;

Skt. pari-jñāta + Suffix ka

§ 32.1.27A4. tasya dāni aparo bhikṣuḥ vṛddhatarako parijñātako bhavati

§ 32.4.27A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu āgantuko āgato bhavati, tasya koci bhikṣu parijñātako bhavati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

paritta~

paritta~

“anvertraut”#

☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3

⇒ parītta~, parinda-, anu-parinda-

§ 4.11.5A3. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno paritto

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-tyakta~

pari-tyakta~

§ 14.4.13A3. “kiṃ vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?”

比丘威儀法詞典

parityāga~

pari-nir-vvā-

“ins Nirvāṇa eingehen”

☞ § 4.16, Anm. 6

§ 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

parinda- (BHS)

parinda- (BHS)

“anvertrauen”;

vgl. BHSG, S. 220. parinda-ti, parīnda-ti; BHSD, s.v. parindāmi

☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3

⇒ paritta~, parītta~, anu-parinda-

§ 6.10.8A1. bhagavatā ca anekaparyāyeṇa glāno parindito

§ 50.5.43A7. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito

§ 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ “dīrghāyu, eṣo vihārako tumhāṇaṃ anuparindito bhavatu. ...” evaṃ parindiya gantavyaṃ

§ 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā, vaktavyaṃ “upāsaka, dānapati, ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti. ime bhikṣu tava pari{ni}nditā bhavantu.”

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-pūraya~

pari-pūraya~

“füllen; verstopfen”

⇒ pūraya-

§ 13.9.12B3. udakabhramā vā praṇālibhramā vā paripūritā bhavanti, śodhayitavyāḥ

§ 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā viśālikā vā piṇḍakā vā paripūriya dātavyā

§ 50.8.43B4. pānīyaṃ parisrāvayitavyaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ paripūriyāṇaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-√pṛcch

pari-√pṛcch

§ 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?”

§ 8.12.9B2. sukhaṃ pratikramāpayitavyaṃ, uddiśitvā vā paripṛcchitvā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-prāpaya- (BHS)

pari-prāpaya- (BHS)

“erfüllen”

⇒ pari-prāpta~

§ 31.36.27A2. yadi tāva stūpikena vā kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, stūpikaṃ kāryaṃ pariprāpayitavyaṃ. sāṃghikena kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, sāṃghikaṃ kāryaṃ pariprāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-prāpta~ (BHS)

pari-prāpta~ (BHS)

“erfüllt”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. pariprāpayati

⇒ pari-prāpaya-

§ 31.37.27A2. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāpta<ṃ> kāryaṃ bhavati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

paribhāṇḍa~

paribhoga~

⇒ paudgalika-paribhoga~, yathāsukha-paribhoga~, rikta-paribhoga~, bhoga~

§ 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...}

§ 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-makṣita~

pari-makṣita~

⇒ makṣita-parimakṣita~

比丘威儀法詞典

parimaṇḍala~

parimaṇḍala~

“vollständig; rund”

§ 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) parima<ṇḍa>laṃ (“rund”) vā caturasraṃ vā nicitavyā

§ 47.6.40B7. parimaṇḍalaṃ cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā antaragharaṃ praviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-marda-

pari-marda-

“reiben, pressen”

§ 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā

§ 59.4.48A7~48B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati vinodayitavyaṃ, nirālaṃ parimarditavyaṃ, nakkā vā parimarditavyā

§ 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ

§ 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... vinodetavyā ni{la}lāṭam vā parimarditavyaṃ, nāsā vā parimarditavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-marddita~

pariyo#

Bedeutung?

§ 43.1.38A2. ... droṇīyo [ḍa]ddhāyo pariyo (od. ’pariyo?) bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-varja-#

pari-varja-#

“meiden, vermeiden, herumgehen” (= pari-varjaya-)

⇒ pari-varjaya-, varja-

§ 4.10.5A1~2. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dārakadārikāṃ {sa} parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ;

vgl. § 5.9.6B6. bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi yāva dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśitavyaṃ

§ 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs)

§ 41.31.35B7. dhūlī parivarjantena gantavyaṃ

§ 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti ...

§ 47.7.41A1. kaṇṭakaśākhā parivarjantena sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo <bhittīḥ> parivarjantena praviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-varjaya-

pari-varjaya-

⇒ pari-varja-, varjaya-

§ 5.9.6B6. bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi yāva dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśitavyaṃ;

vgl. § 4.10.5A1~2. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dārakadārikāṃ {sa} parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ;

§ 6.9.7B6. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ pariharantehi dārakadārikāṃ pariharantehi praviśi-tavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-vartta-

pari-vartta-

“sich umdrehen”

§ 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, ... parivarttiyāṇaṃ bhūyo nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati”, gantavyaṃ

§ 51.8.44A4. atha dāni parivarttiya nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyatî”ti

比丘威儀法詞典

parivarttakaṃ#

parivāra~

§ 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako śreṣṭhinā saparivāreṇa gatena ... rakṣamāṇo āsati

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-√viṣ (BHS)

pari-√viṣ (BHS)

“dienen”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. pariviṣati; BHSG, S. 231a, s.v. viṣ; Pā. parivisati

§ 4.1.4A6. gacchāma samagraṃ bhikṣusaṃghaṃ pariviṣiṣyāmaḥ (Hs. pariviśi°) (≒ § 5.3. 6A7, § 6.1.7A5)

§ 5.1.6A5. gacchāma samagraṃ bhikṣusaṃghaṃ pariviṣiṣyāma (Hs. pariviśi°) (= § 6.3. 7A7)

比丘威儀法詞典

pariveṇa~ (BHS, Pā)

pariveṇa~ (BHS, Pā)

“Mönchszelle”

☞ § 2.10, Anm. 1, § 12.10, Anm. 4

§ 2.10.3A3~4. dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti ... na dūradūre pariveṇā bhavanti

§ 3.11.4A3. na dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti

§ 12.8.11B4. yaṃ tahiṃ pariveṇe bhavati bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ sarvvaṃ samudānitavyaṃ

§ 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā ... grāhayitavyā

§ 12.11.11B6. yadi tāva āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, dūre dūre pariveṇā bhavaṃti, ... atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, āsanne āsanne pariveṇā bhavanti

比丘威儀法詞典

pariveṇika~#

pariveṣaka~

⇒ pariveśakapari-

比丘威儀法詞典

veṣāpaya- (BHS[BHSG, S. 231b])

veṣāpaya- (BHS[BHSG, S. 231b])

“dienen”

§ 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo, bhikṣusaṃgho pariveṣāpayitavyo (Hs. pariveśāp°)

比丘威儀法詞典

pariśaṅkiya~

pariśaṅkiya~

⇒ uśśaṃkiya-pariśaṅkiya~

比丘威儀法詞典

pariśuṣka~

pariśuṣka~

⇒ śuṣka~

§ 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... yaṃ kālaṃ pariśuṣkāni bhavanti, tato pūretavyāni

比丘威儀法詞典

pariśrāvaka~

pariśrāvaka~

⇒ kiṃkara-pariśrāvaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

pariśrāvaṇa~ (BHS)

pariśrāvaṇa~ (BHS)

“Wasserfilter”;

vgl. BHS. parisrāvaṇa, Pā. parissāvana

⇒ pātra-pariśrāvaṇa~, pari-srāvaya-

§ 43.9.38A7. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā sāharitvā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pari-śrāvaya-#

pari-śrāvaya-#

“filtern”

⇒ pari-srāvaya

比丘威儀法詞典

pariṣkāra~

pari-hara-

§ 6.9.7B6. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ pariharantehi dārakadārikāṃ pariharantehi praviśitavyaṃ;

vgl. § 4.10.5A1~2. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dārakadārikāṃ {sa} parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ;

§ 5.9.6B6. bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi yāva dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśitavyaṃ

§ 17.6.15A2. anyehi lippitavyaṃ, anyehi majjitavyaṃ, anyehi udakaṃ pariharitavyaṃ

§ 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā ... paripūriya dātavyā, anyehi pariharitavyaṃ

§ 17.8.15A3. anyehi udakaḥ pariharitavyaḥ, anye<hi> mṛttikā pariharttavyā

§ 17.9.15A3~4. śarkaroṭakā vā apakkapāṃsuko vā pariharitavyo ākoṭayitavyo .... anyair ggomaya pariharttavyaḥ, anyair udakaṃ pariharttavyaḥ

§ 17.10.15A5. anyehi udakaṃ pariharttavyaṃ, anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ

§ 41.1.33B3. na͡iva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu

§ 41.2.33B5. na͡iva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ

§ 47.1.40B3. na͡iva dhūliṃ pariharanti, na kardamaṃ pariharanti

比丘威儀法詞典

parihāṇi

parihāṇi

“Abnahme”

§ 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.”

比丘威儀法詞典

parītta~

parītta~

“anvertraut”

☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3

⇒ paritta~, parinda-, anu-parinda-

§ 5.10.7A1. bhagavatânekaparyāyeṇa glāno parītto

比丘威儀法詞典

paryaṅka~

paryaṅka~

⇒ arddha-paryaṅka~, uṣṭra-paryaṅka~, svastika-paryaṅka~

§ 12.16.12A4. navakehi parya<ṃke>na vītināmayitavyaṃ

§ 29.4.24B1. atha dāni bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ

§ 30.8.25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā

§ 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paryāya~

pary-eṣa- (BHS)

“suchen, begehren”;

vgl. Pā. pariyesati

§ 4.7.4B6. svakasvakāṃ vṛttiṃ paryeṣatha (= § 5.7.6B5)

§ 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha”

§ 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya (Hs. paryetha°) vikālo bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

paryeṣṭi~

paryeṣṭi~

⇒ āhāra-paryeṣṭi~

比丘威儀法詞典

parvvata~

parvvata~

§ 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... (= § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 27.2.23B5, § 28.2.24A2)

比丘威儀法詞典

parvvan~

parvvan~

§ 29.4.24B2. atha dāni bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi (Hs. garbhāni) āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

parṣā~

parṣā~

(1) (BHS) “Versammlung”

⇒ asma-parṣā~, ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~

(2) “eine Gruppe von mehreren Mönchen/Nonnen”# (ein gegensätzlicher Begriff zu saṃgha und pāriveṇika)

☞ § 26.3, Anm. 1

⇒ pārṣikā~

§ 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ}

§ 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pārṣikā bhavati, tāye parṣāye gantavyaṃ

§ 42.13.36B6. jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye (Hs. yathāyo)

§ 42.13.36B6. yadi tāva parṣāye (Hs. paryāye) bhavati, ye tahiṃ parṣāye (Hs. paryāye) tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ

§ 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ (Gen. sg.) pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ

§ 42.24.37B2. atha dāni parṣāye bhavati, tehi gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

palāla~

palāla~

“Stroh”

§ 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā

比丘威儀法詞典

palikhāṭi~#

palikhāṭi~#

“Stummel (des Dochtes)”?

§ 53.15.45B5. yadi dīpavartti dagdhikā bhavati, palikhāṭir vvā okaḍḍhitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

paliguddhaka~#

paliguddhaka~#

“beschäftigt”

☞ § 31.33, Anm. 4

§ 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

palīnakā̆~#

pallaṃka~ (Pā, Pkt)

“Sitzposition mit untergeschlagenen Beinen”;

vgl. CDIAL 7964. palyaṅka; Skt. paryaṅka; SWTF, s.vv., paryaṅka, paryaṅga

§ 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiyāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pallaṭṭa- (Pkt)

pallaṭṭa- (Pkt)

“sich umdrehen”;

< Skt. pari-vartate

☞ § 30.9, Anm. 1

⇒ parivarttakaṃ

§ 30.9.25A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ duḥkhaśāyī bhavati, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ pallaṭṭanto śayati, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

pallava~

pavana~

⇒ nitya-pacana~

比丘威儀法詞典

√paś

√paś

“sehen; denken, überlegen”

⇒ paśyillaka~

§ 1.1.1B2. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “paśyatha bhaṇe (☞ § 1.1, Anm. 4) ...” (= § 5.1.6A5)

§ 4.13.5A6. nâpi kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya layyalayāye bhuṃjiyāṇa utthihiya gantuṃ

§ 4.13.5A7. na dāni ... utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya

§ 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs)

§ 5.11.7A2. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ (≒ § 6.11.8A2)

§ 17.12.15A6. yo yaṃ paśyati, tena yyeva gaṇṭhī karttavyā. ... yo ye paśyati tena yeva ...yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yyeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yeva paśyati ...

§ 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā anye bhikṣū na paśyeṃsu

§ 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” (≒ § 19.2.17B4, § 20.6.19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 51.1.44A1)

§ 34.1.28B1. te dāni odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe vayaṃ yeva sannipatitā "karmmāṇi kariṣyāma" tti ...” (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B1, § 37.1. 29B7)

§ 18.17.16A5. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “ko imāyo dahiṣyatî”ti ...

§ 18.37.17A1. ete dve bhikṣū cetiyaṃ vandanti, yaṃ paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ, ...

§ 19.32.18B6. atha dāni koci bhikṣu paśyati, nâyaṃ vaktavyo “ko eṣo? kim vā? ...”

§ 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacāriṃ gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ”

§ 20.5.19B1. ete bhikṣavo ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacārī gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ”

§ 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo

§ 25.1.22B1. so dāni hastāṃ nirmmādiya vihārakaṃ praviṣṭo, paśyati kapālikānāṃ rāśiṃ

§ 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho

§ 31.5.25B4. atha dāni corā saprasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu

§ 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu (“denken”) “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.”

§ 41.1.33B4. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti tāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ ṛktāṃ

§ 41.2.33B6. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kṛtāṃ

§ 41.10.34A6. so dāni brāhmaṇo tasya ācāragocaraṃ paśyiya tuṣṭo

§ 41.32.36A1. bhikṣuḥ paśyati (“überlegt, denkt”) “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti

§ 44.6.39A4. so mārgganto {na} paśyati tasya cīvarakasya koṇakaṃ

§ 48.2.41A6. sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe, ...”

§ 49.1.42A1. paśyati (“denkt”) “mā imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti

§ 49.1.42A1. yaṃ kālaṃ paśyati (“denkt”) “na͡iva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ. ...” ti

§ 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ kālaṃ nidhyāyantaṃ

§ 49.5.42B2. atha dāni na paśyati, hastena gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ ekato vā ekato vā uvvattayitavyo

§ 49.7.42B6. rathyāntaraṃ vā paśyati ... nagaradvāre paśyati ... panthe paśyati ... yato eva paśyati tato eva nivarttitavyaṃ

§ 50.1.43A2. yāva paśyati so vihārakaṃ ghaṭṭitakaṃ

§ 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati (“denkt”) “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃ-bhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ

§ 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatra͡iva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatra͡iva bhuṃjitavyaṃ

§ 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.”

§ 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ uttheti, ...

§ 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, ...

§ 51.12.44A5. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ hastāṃ dhovati, ...

§ 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti, paśyanti (“dachten”) “yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ”;

vgl. § 52.1.44B1. jānāma (“wir dachten”) vayaṃ “yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ”

§ 56.5.47A5. bhikṣuḥ paśyati (“denkt”) “dvitīye prahāṇe avītakaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti ...

§ 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati (“denkt”) “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

paśu~

paśu~

§ 4.20.6A2. putram vā paśum vā ārabhya (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

paśu-pālaka~

paśu-pālaka~

§ 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparinditavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

paścā (BHS)

paścā (BHS)

“danach”

⇒ paścāt

§ 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya ...

比丘威儀法詞典

paścāc-chramaṇa~ (BHS, SWTF)

paścāt

“danach”

⇒ paścā

§ 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā ...

§ 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa ...

§ 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa

§ 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ

§ 19.42.19A4. purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ, tataḥ paścāt pratigrāhayitavyaṃ

§ 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā

§ 25.14.23A1~2. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ ... śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ ... pratisāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano

§ 42.12.36B5. te dāni agni datvā paścād gaṇḍī ākoṭenti

§ 42.12.36B6. na dāni agniṃ datvā paścād gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā

§ 42.31.37B7. atha dāni koci paścāt praviśati ...

§ 53.6.45A6. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo, paścāt prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo

§ 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paścād-bhaktam

paścān-nipātin~#

“sich später (als andere Leute) niederlegend”;

vgl. Pā. pacchānipātin~

§ 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitr̥̄ṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī kiṃkarapariśrāvako

比丘威儀法詞典

paścā-vastuka~

paścā-vastuka~

⇒ paścād-vastuka~

比丘威儀法詞典

paścima~

paścimaka~

⇒ purima-paścimaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

paśyillaka~#

paśyillaka~#

“umsichtig, vorsichtig” (?)

< √paś + Suffix -illa (= Skt. -ila)

☞ § 47.9, Anm. 1

§ 47.9.41A2. sambādharathyā bhavati susaṃvṛtena paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

√pā

√pā

⇒ piba-, *pāyita~, pāye-, pīta~, pītaka~

§ 40.10.33A4. pātraṃ vā oṭṭhā cikkaṇaṃ bhavati, nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ

§ 40.11.33A4. agroṣṭhehi pātavyaṃ (Hs. yātavyaṃ)

§ 40.14.33A6. agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ

§ 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ

§ 41.15.34B5. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṃsu~

pāṃsu~

“Staub”

⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~

§ 41.1.33B3. na͡iva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu

§ 41.1.33B3. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddentā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramanti

§ 41.2.33B5. na͡iva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ

§ 41.2.33B5. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddantā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramatha

§ 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṃsuka~

pāṃsuka~

“Pulver (aus ungebrannten Ziegeln)” (?)

⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~

§ 23.9.21B6. uppeḍanako bhavati, pāṃsukena vā śarkaroṭena vā pratyāstaritavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṃsukūlika~ (SWTF)

pāṃsukūlika~ (SWTF)

“(ein Mönch), der sich in Lumpen kleidet”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. pāṃśukūlika, Pā. paṃsukūlika

§ 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko, pāṃsukūliko (Hs. °kuliko)

比丘威儀法詞典

pāka~

pāka~

⇒ pātra-pāka~

比丘威儀法詞典

pāñca-daśika~ (SWTF)

pāñca-daśika~ (SWTF)

“auf den fünfzehnten (Mondtag) fallend”

⇒ cātur-daśika~, pāñca-daśī~

§ 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyati?

§ 1.7.1B6. āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā (≒ § 2.5.2B5)

§ 2.5.2B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā (= § 3.6.3B4)

比丘威儀法詞典

pāñca-daśī~

pāñca-daśī~

⇒ pāñca-daśika~, trayo-daśī~, cātur-daśī~

§ 12.11.11B6. cāturddaśīyam vā pāñcadaśīyam vā śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṭaya-

pāṭaya-

⇒ pāṭita~, pāṭita-vipāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~

§ 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṭalā-gulikā~#

pāṭalā-gulikā~#

“Strauß von Pāṭalā-Blumen”

§ 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

Pāṭaliputra~

pāṭita~

“zerrissen”

⇒ pāṭita-vipāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~

§ 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (?; Hs. yathā pāṭito)”

§ 47.4.40B6. yahiṃ lagnaṃ tahi lagnaṃ; yahiṃ pāṭitaṃ tahiṃ pāṭitaṃ

§ 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... pāṭitaṃ vā vipāṭitaṃ bhavati, sīvitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṭita-vipāṭita~#

pāṭita-vipāṭita~#

“zerrissen”

☞ § 11.2, Anm. 4

⇒ pāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~

§ 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ (≒ § 11.3.10B4)

§ 11.9.11A1. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ vā pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ vā adhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 13.12.12B4)

§ 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 12.3.11B1. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 12.7.11B4. śayyāsanaṃ bhavati omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhoviya sīvitavyaṃ

§ 12.18.12A5. nâpi kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 13.10.12B3. śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ bhavati pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhovayitavyaṃ rañjetavyaṃ

§ 14.7.13A6. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ...

§ 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā ...

§ 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 15.3.14A1. śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 16.2.14A6. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ

§ 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā ... bimbohanakā vā cilimilikā vā omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā

§ 44.11.39B1. cīvaraṃ ... omayilamayilam vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā

§ 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni cīvarakāni omaïlamaïlāṇi pāṭitavipāṭitāni kriyanti

§ 55.10.47A1. na kṣamati so geṇḍuko adhyupekṣituṃ pāṭitavipāṭito (Hs. °itā)

§ 56.7.47A7. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṭiyaka~ (BHS)

pāṭiyaka~ (BHS)

“eine Einzelperson betreffend”;

< *prātiyeka < *prātyeka (vgl. Skt. pratyeka)?

⇒ pāḍiyakka-pāḍiyakka~

§ 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ubhayato sāṃghikaṃ sarvva{ṃ}sāṃghikaṃ pariveṇikaṃ pāṭiya<kaṃ> bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṭha~

pāṭha~

“Rezitation”

☞ Zwischen-Zusammenfassung, Anm. 1

⇒ pāṭhaka~

Kolophon 50B2. Ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṭhaka~

pāṭhaka~

⇒ madhyuddeśa-pāṭhaka~, pāṭha~

比丘威儀法詞典

pāḍiyakka-pāḍiyakka~ (Pkt)

pāḍiyakka-pāḍiyakka~ (Pkt)

“je einzeln”;

< Skt. pratyeka; vgl. Pā. pāṭiyekka, BHS. pāṭiyaka

☞ § 31.3, Anm. 1

⇒ pāṭiyaka~

§ 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi pāḍiyakkapāḍiyak{a}kāni apāvuraṇāni upasthāpayitavyāni

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṇḍara~

pāṇḍara~

§ 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati

§ 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ

§ 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṇḍu

pāṇḍu

⇒ sudhā-pāṇḍu-lepana~

比丘威儀法詞典

pāṇḍu-roga~

pāṇḍu-roga~

“Gelbsucht”

§ 19.42.19A3. atha dāni glāno bhavati bhikṣuḥ pāṇḍurogeṇa, vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā ...”

比丘威儀法詞典

pātaya-

pātaya-

⇒ √pat

§ 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra~

pātraka~

“Almosenschale”

§ 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.”

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-cīvara~ (SWTF)

pātra-cīvara~ (SWTF)

“Almosenschale und Gewand”;

vgl. Pā. patta-cīvara~

§ 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 31.4.25B3~4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... anupāletavyo, pātracīvaraṃ ālambitavyaṃ. nâpi dāni pātracīvaraṃ gṛhṇitvā adarśanena gantavyaṃ. atha khalu avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ

§ 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, pātracīvaraṃ pratisāmayitavyaṃ, vihārako uddiśitavyo

§ 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni kālasya͡iva nivāsayitvā pātracīvaram ādāya

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-nikubjana~#

pātra-nikubjana~#

“das Umkehren der Almosenschale”

vgl. AN[Übers] IV, S. 189, Anm. 137);

BhiVin(Ma-L) § 295.10B3.6f. pātranikubjanā-sammuti-pratisaṃyuktaṃ;

Mvy 9252. pātra-nikubjanam;

Pā. patta-nikkujjana;

Nolot 1999: 80f.

☞ § 31.32, Anm. 2

§ 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutīkṛtaṃ. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-pariśrāvaṇa~#

pātra-pariśrāvaṇa~#

“Almosenschale und Wasserfilter”

⇒ pariśrāvaṇa~

§ 40.1.32B2. pātrapariśrāvaṇāni dhovanti

§ 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto ... pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-pāka~#

pātra-pāka~#

“das Erhitzen einer Almosenschale”

☞ § 32.6, Anm. 3

§ 32.6.27B1. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-pīṭhaka~#

pātra-pīṭhaka~#

“Ständer für Almosenschalen”;

vgl. v. Hinüber 1992: 44f.

☞ § 25.10, Anm. 1

§ 25.10.22B6. pātraprasevikā na bhavati, pātrapīṭhake thapetavyaṃ. atha dāni pātrapīṭhakaṃ na bhavati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-pūra~ (BHS; s. BHSD, s.v. pūra [2])

pātra-pūra~ (BHS; s. BHSD, s.v. pūra [2])

“eine Almosenschale voll (Wasser)”

§ 40.9.33A2. labhyā dāni pātrapūraṃ dātuṃ (Hs. vā)

比丘威儀法詞典

Pātra-pratisaṃyukta~

Pātra-pratisaṃyukta~

“der Abschnitt über die Almosenschale”

☞ § 4.19, Anm. 2, 3; S. 565f. in diesem Band

§ 4.19.6A2. “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa ādiśitavyā yathā Pātrapratisaṃyukte

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-prasevikā~#

pātra-prasevikā~#

“Beutel für die Almosenschale”

☞ § 25.8, Anm. 4

⇒ prasevikā~

§ 15.7.14A3. anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā (Hs. °veśikā) sthāpayitavyā

§ 25.8.22B5. atha khalu pātraprasevikāyāṃ (Hs. °veśikāyāṃ) prakṣipiya sthapetavyaṃ

§ 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā

§ 25.10.22B6. pātraprasevikā na bhavati, pātrapīṭhake thapetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-mālaka~#

pātra-mālaka~#

“Nische (od. Plattform) für Almosenschalen”;

vgl. Pa. patta-māḷaka

☞ § 25.15, Anm. 4

§ 25.15.23A3. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari jālavātāyane vā pātramālake vā, yathā na ghaṭṭeṃsu

比丘威儀法詞典

pātra-saṃhṛta~#

pātrodaka~ (pātra-u°) (SWTF)

“Wasser zum Reinigen der Almosenschale”;

vgl. Pā. pattodaka

☞ § 4.13, Anm. 6; § 40.7, Anm. 6

§ 4.13.5A7. atha khalu saṃghasthavireṇa āgametavyaṃ, dīrghodakaṃ (lies: pātrodakaṃ) dāpetavyaṃ

§ 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda~

pāda~

⇒ ādra-pāda~, dhovita-pāda~, pada~, pādato kṛtvā

§ 1.1.1B2. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāni (Hs. pādāna) vandiṣyāma

§ 2.1.2B2. gacchāma samagrasya saṃghasya pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 3.1.3A7)

§ 5.1.6A5. gacchāma ... āryamiśrāṇāñ ca pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7)

§ 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya ...

§ 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa

§ 8.6.9A3. pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhopayitavyā

§ 8.12.9B1. pādā dhovayitavyā, pādā mrakṣetavyā (≒ § 10.5.10A5)

§ 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati ... pātraṃ (Hs. pādam) vā nirmmādayituṃ

§ 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ astariyāṇaṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ...

§ 21.5.20B2. tenâpi pādāṃ dhovayitvā kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya ...

§ 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ

§ 21.5.20B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ pādā<ṃ> na{ṃ} dhovayitukāmo bhavati, na kṣamati, ...

§ 21.5.20B3. bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni (Acc. pl.) thapiyāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ

§ 23.4.1.21A7. atha dāni pratipādako na bhavati, leṅkaṭakehi pādā bandhitavyā

§ 23.4.3.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastāṃ dhovituṃ, mukhaṃ dhovituṃ

§ 24.6.22A4. atha dāni uppaṃsulo vihāro bhavati, bhūmīye cchoriya pādena mardditavyo

§ 24.7.22A4. atha khalu cchoriyāṇa pādena marditavyaṃ

§ 24.12.22A7. <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo

§ 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... pādaṃ vā mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ

§ 29.4.24B2. atha khalu eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte viśrāmiya sammiñjiya, dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo

§ 29.6.24B4. ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ

§ 30.4.25A1. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya ...

§ 30.7.25A4. pādena pādam ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā, ...

§ 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.21.26A4. yadi tāva ācikṣanti pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ...

§ 31.22.26A6. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vanditavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ

§ 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ

§ 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha

§ 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ... pādāṃ prakṣālehi, hastāṃ nirmmādehi, viśramāhi

§ 32.3.27A6. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ

§ 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs). atha khalu pratisaṃmodayitavyaṃ

§ 32.10.27B4. yathā na duḥkhāpiye pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs)

§ 32.4.27A7. evaṃ pādā vanditavyāḥ;

§ 32.13.27B6. evaṃ pādā vanditavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B4)

§ 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā

§ 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ

§ 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ

§ 41.1.33B3. mātrāye yūyam āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha

§ 41.2.33B5. jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya

§ 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye

§ 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha

§ 41.3.33B6. evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1; Uddāna [V].39B2)

§ 41.3.33B7. evaṃ bhikṣavo pādāṃ dhovatha

§ 41.6.34A3. pādāṃ dhovati

§ 41.7.34A4. vāmena hastena pādāṃ dhovati

§ 41.7.34A4. vāmo pādo dhovito

§ 41.7.34A4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovito

§ 41.23.35A7. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ

§ 41.23.35A7. vāmena hastena pādā{ṃ} dhovitavyā

§ 41.23.35A7. vāmo pādo dhovayitavyo

§ 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovayitavyo

§ 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā jhallajhallāye pādāṃ dhovituṃ

§ 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti

§ 41.26.35B3. tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti

§ 41.27.35B3. vāmena hastena pādā dhovitavyā

§ 41.27.35B4. vāmo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5)

§ 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5)

§ 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇena hastena pādā dhovitavyā

§ 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ

§ 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādehi dhovitehi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ

§ 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti bhūyo dhovitavyā

§ 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, tahiṃ pādāṃ prakṣālitvā

§ 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> (oder pāda-j°?) prasphoṭitvā prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā ca dārakadārikāhi (Hs. °ehi) pādehi mardditaparimardditā...

§ 48.2.41A5. dārakadārikāhi mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā

§ 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti

§ 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ

§ 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ

§ 57.11.48A1. nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti

§ 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ... eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pādaka~

pādaka~

⇒ ādra-pādaka~

§ 13.13.12B5. pādakā utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, suthapitā karttavyāḥ

§ 21.5.20B3. na kṣamati adhotakehi pādakehi kaṭhinaṃ okramituṃ

§ 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

*pāda-jaṃghā

*pāda-jaṃghā

“Füße und Unterschenkel”

§ 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādājaṃghā (lies: entweder pādā jaṃghā <ca> oder pāda-jaṃghā) prasphoṭitvā prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-taṭṭhaka~#

pāda-taila~#

“Fußöl”

☞ § 31.7, Anm. 2

⇒ pāda-mrakṣaṇa~

§ 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena

§ 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ pādatailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pādato kṛtvā #

pādato kṛtvā #

“indem man die Beine gegen jemanden oder etwas ausstreckt”;

vgl. Skt. pādataḥ √kṛ

§ 30.11.25A5~6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śayyāṃ kalpayituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā upādhyāyācāryaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-dhovana~ (Pā)

pāda-dhovana~ (Pā)

“das Waschen der Füße”;

vgl. Skt. pāda-dhāvana~

⇒ pāda-śauca~, dhovana~, dhovanikā~

§ 41.1.33B3. bhikṣu āgacchanti pādadhovanāya

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-dhovanikā~#

pāda-dhovanikā~#

“Wanne zum Waschen der Füße”

☞ § 31.21, Anm. 3

⇒ pāridhovanikā~, dhovanikā~

§ 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi?

§ 31.21.26A4. yadi tāva ācikṣanti pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ

§ 40.7.32B7. pādadhovanikā pūrayitavyā

§ 41.1.33B2. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ...

§ 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kariya ...

§ 41.1.33B4. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti tāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ ṛktāṃ

§ 41.1.33B4. kiṃ dāni ayaṃ pādadhovanikā omuddhikṛtā?

§ 41.2.33B5. pādadhovanikāyāṃ gacchiya jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya ...

§ 41.2.33B5. pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kariya ...

§ 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye

§ 41.2.33B6. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kṛtāṃ?

§ 41.25.35B2. sarvvasaṃghasya pādadhovanikā bhavati, ...

§ 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... omuddhikāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ karttuṃ

§ 41.25.35B2. acchaṭikāṃ karentena pādadhovanikāyāṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 41.26.35B2. khaṇḍikā (Hs. khaṇuikā) pādadhovanikā bhavati

§ 41.27.35B3. tato yadi tāva dakṣiṇānte pādadhovanikā bhava{ṃ}ti ...

§ 41.27.35B4. atha dāni vāmānte pādadhovanikā bhavati

§ 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa ohitahastena vā {pādadhovanikāyā} upaviśituṃ

§ 41.31.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ ... āsituṃ

Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ pādadhovanike (Loc. sg. fem.! Aber vermutlich eine Verschreibung für dhovitapādehi) pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-dhovanīya~#

pāda-dhovanīya~#

“Waschwasser für die Füße”

⇒ paridhovaniya~, paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanikā~, pāridhovanī̆ya~

§ 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pādadhovanīye pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāda-mrakṣaṇa~ (SWTF)

pāda-mrakṣaṇa~ (SWTF)

“Salbe für die Füße”#;

vgl. SWTF, s.v. pāda-mrakṣaṇa (“das Salben der Füße”)

☞ § 31.29, Anm. 4

⇒ pāda-taila~

§ 31.29.26B4. pādamrakṣaṇena cchandayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

*pādopadhānaka~ (°da-upa°)

pānīya~

⇒ Dhara-pānīya~, Gaṃgā-pānīya~, guḍa-pānīya~, Śoṇa-pānīya~

§ 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ ... upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti

§ 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti

§ 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo bhuñjantasya pānīyaṃ vāritavyaṃ

§ 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha

§ 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā

§ 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ...

§ 40.1.32B2. āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti

§ 40.1.32B2. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ...

§ 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū ... pānīyaṃ mārggenti

§ 40.2.32B4. pānīyaṃ mārgganti

§ 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 40.17.33B2)

§ 40.4.32B5. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ...

§ 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ...

§ 40.5.32B6. yathā pānīyaṃ caukṣaṃ bhaveya

§ 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ

§ 40.7.32B7. paridhovanīyena pānīyena śirikuṇḍikā pūrayitavyā

§ 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ (Hs. gogotrasthā) pānīyaṃ (Hs. panīyaṃ) bhavati

§ 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati tato pānīyāto (Abl. sg. neut.) kalpiyakarakī ... pūrayituṃ

§ 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati ... hastodakapādodakaṃ vā pānīyaṃ dātuṃ

§ 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti

§ 40.9.33A2. “icchāmi pānīyaṃ dīyamānan” ti

§ 40.10.33A3. bhaktāgreṇa pānīyaṃ vārentena ...

§ 40.10.33A3. caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ

§ 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ

§ 40.12.33A4. pānīyaṃ vārentena ...

§ 40.13.33A5. paścādbhaktaṃ pānīyaṃ vārentena ...

§ 40.13.33A5. ekinā hastena pānīyaṃ parigṛhṇitavyaṃ

§ 41.6.34A3. pānīyasya dakānakaṃ pūrīya ...

§ 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ

§ 41.15.34B5. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ

§ 41.16.34B6. tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya

§ 41.16.34B6. senāpati, pānīyaṃ pratyavekṣituṃ

§ 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ...

§ 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati ...

Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ pānīye (Hs. jānīye!) pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 50.8.43B4. pānīyaṃ parisrāvayitavyaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ paripūriyāṇaṃ ...

§ 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ

§ 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatra͡iva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatra͡iva bhuṃjitavyaṃusw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pānīya-ghaṭikā~#

pānīya-ghaṭikā~#

“Wassertopf, Krug”

§ 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pānīya-dāyaka~#

pānīya-dāyaka~#

“jemand, der Wasser schenkt”

§ 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

*pānīya-dhārikā~

pānīya-maṇḍapa~ (Pā; Avś II 86)

“Wasserpavillon”

§ 40.1.32B2. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ parighaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ kariya gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ

§ 40.1.32B3. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito thapito

§ 40.2.32B4. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito kariya thapito

§ 40.4.32B5. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ ghaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ (Hs. tāpiyam°) kariya ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pānīya-vārika~ (BHS)

pānīya-vārika~ (BHS)

“ein Mönch, der für Trinkwasser verantwortlich ist”

☞ § 40.4. Anm. 3

⇒ vārika~

§ 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo

§ 40.9.33A2. pānīyavārikāṃ (Hs. p°-dhārikāṃ) yācati, “icchāmi pānīyaṃ dīyamānan” ti

比丘威儀法詞典

pānīyāvaśeṣa~# (°nīya-ava°)

pānīyāvaśeṣa~# (°nīya-ava°)

“Rest des Wassers”

§ 41.9.34A5. dakānakaṃ dhoviya pānīyāvaśeṣaṃ cchoriya ātape śoṣitaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāpa~

pāpa~

⇒ puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~

比丘威儀法詞典

pāpa-karmman~

pāpa-karmman~

§ 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs)

§ 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma yūyaṃ idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha

比丘威儀法詞典

pāpa-bhikṣuṇī~#

pāpa-bhikṣuṇī~#

“böse Nonne”;

vgl. Pā. pāpa-bhikkhunī

§ 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ....) asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāpa-śrāmaṇerī~#

pāpīyas~

“böse”

§ 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.”

比丘威儀法詞典

pāyattika-dharmma~#

pāyattika-dharmma~#

“gerechte Handlung durch Wiedergutmachung”?

☞ § 40.16, Anm. 5

§ 40.16.33B1. labhyā dāni pāyattikadharmmāya (Hs. pāpicakadharmmīya) yācituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

*pāyita~?

*pāyita~?

“getrunken”

☞ § 8.5, Anm. 9

⇒ √pā, pīta~

§ 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für *pāyitā?) peyāpātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāye-#

pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ #

“von einer Seite auf die andere (drehen)”? (= pārśvena pārśvaṃ)

§ 30.9.25A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ duḥkhaśāyī bhavati, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ pallaṭṭanto śayati, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

pārājika~ (BHS, SWTF)

pārājika~ (BHS, SWTF)

“Pārājika-Vergehen”

§ 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa ...

§ 1.6.1B5. catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā

§ 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāye ca

§ 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca

§ 7.4.8B2. dve aniyatā na pāreti, antamasato catvāri pārājikāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4.10A2)

比丘威儀法詞典

pāridhovanikā~#

pāridhovanikā~#

“Waschwasser (für die Füße)” oder “Wanne zum Waschen der Füße”?

☞ § 40.7, Anm. 2

⇒ paridhovaniya~, paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanī̆ya~, pāda-dhovanikā~

§ 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ, hastaṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ, pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāridhovanī̆ya~#

pāridhovanī̆ya~#

(1) “Waschwasser (für die Füße)”;

(2) “Waschwasser (für die Füße) betreffend”

☞ § 40.7, Anm. 2

⇒ paridhovaniya~, paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanikā~, pāda-dhovanīya~

(1) “Waschwasser (für die Füße)”

§ 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ

§ 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pāridhovanīyaṃ karoti

(2) “Waschwasser (für die Füße) betreffend”

§ 40.9.33A3. atha khalu pāridhovanīyaṃ udakaṃ dātavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pāribhogika~ (BHS, Pā)

pāribhogika~ (BHS, Pā)

“für den Gebrauch geeignet” oder “auf Gebrauchsgegenstände bezüglich”?

☞ § 40.7, Anm. 7

§ 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

pi ... pi

piṭaka~

“Pustel”

⇒ utpāta-gaṇḍa-piṭaka~

§ 30.10.25A5. jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, dakṣiṇe pārśve gaṇḍaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā bhavati, ...

§ 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

piṭharikā~ (BHS)

piṭharikā~ (BHS)

“Pfanne”

§ 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā (Hs. pīṭharikā) adhotakā anupaliptā nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ...

§ 43.4.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā sthālī vā piṭharikā vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍa~

piṇḍa~

⇒ mṛt-piṇḍa~, mṛttikā-piṇḍa~, sudhā-piṇḍa~

§ 4.7.4B6. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya praviśitavyaṃ

§ 4.12.5A4. bhojanaṃ dīyati, mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati, ...

§ 4.13.5A5. nâpi kṣamati saṃghasthavireṇa labdho piṇḍo ... utthihiya gantuṃ

§ 4.13.5A7. na dāni ... utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya

§ 5.7.6B5. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ

§ 5.11.7A1. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ (≒ § 6.11.8A2)

§ 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ (“den schimmeligen Belag”?) śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo

§ 31.27.26B2. āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha

§ 31.30.26B5. āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha

§ 31.27.26B2. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, āgametha sahitakā piṇḍāye praviśiṣyāmaḥ”, tato sahitakehi praviśitavyaṃ

§ 31.31.26B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye (Hs. °āthe) cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ...

§ 41.4.33B7. Vaiśālīn nagarī[ṃ] piṇḍāya praviṣṭo

§ 41.4.34A1. Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati

§ 41.6.34A2. sthaviro ... Vaiśālīṃ piṇḍāya caritvā ...

§ 49.1.42A1. na͡iva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ

§ 51.1.43B7. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti

§ 51.2.44A1. evaṃ piṇḍāye caritavyaṃ

§ 51.15.44A7. evaṃ piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1)

§ 52.1.44A7. te dāni niśrayakaraṇīyā piṇḍāya caranti

§ 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ

§ 52.5.44B4. ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati ... usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍaka~

piṇḍaka~

(1) “Almosengang”

§ 31.27.26B2. atha dāni <na> bhavati, āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} (oder lies piṇḍa<cāri>kānāṃ?) piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni

§ 39.9.31A6. mā piṇḍakena vihariṣyatha

(2) “rund”#

§ 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā viśālikā vā piṇḍakā vā paripūriya dātavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍa-cāra~ (Pā)

piṇḍa-cāra~ (Pā)

“Almosengang”

⇒ piṇḍa-cārikā~

§ 8.7.9A4. yadi piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito bhavati, upanāmayitavyo

§ 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ

§ 52.9.44B7. atha dāni piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhitvā tato eva nadīkūle ... āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ

§ 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ...

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍa-cārika~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

piṇḍa-cārika~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

(1) “Bettelgänger”

§ 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko, pāṃsukūliko

§ 31.27.26B2. atha dāni <na> bhavati, āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} (oder lies piṇḍa<cāri>kānāṃ?) piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni

§ 51.3.44A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati piṇḍacārikena yāva uṭṭhānāto nirghoṭayituṃ

§ 52.2.44B2. evaṃ piṇḍacārikena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 52.10.44B7, Uddāna [VI].45A1)

§ 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ

(2) “durch Bettelgang erworbene Almosenspeise”(?)#

☞ § 31.31, Anm. 1

§ 31.31.26B5. atha dāni piṇḍacāriko bhavati, yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ...

§ 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍa-cārikā~#

piṇḍa-cārikā~#

“Almosengang”

⇒ piṇḍa-cāra~

§ 49.7.42B4. tenâpi dāni piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa vihāraṃ vâgacchiya āhāraṃ kṛtvā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍa-pāta~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

piṇḍa-pāta~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

“Almosenspeise”

⇒ agra-piṇḍapāta~, cīvara-piṇḍapātaśayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~, nīhāra-piṇḍapāta~, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~, nīhāraka-piṇḍapāta~, nīhārika-piṇḍapāta~, piṇḍapātaka~

§ 4.11.5A3. dīrghāyu avaśyan teṣāṃ dātavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ

§ 4.20.6A3. kulāt kulaṃ cariya (lies: cāriya [m.c.]) piṇḍapātaṃ (vs)

§ 5.10.6B7. oheyyaglānakānāṃ piṇḍapāto dāpayitavyo (= § 6.10.7B7)

§ 5.10.7A1. oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapāto gṛhṇitavyo (= § 6.10.8A1)

§ 6.7.7B5. yāva sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāye pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ

§ 6.10.8A1. bhante oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapātaṃ gṛhṇatha

§ 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāto ukkaḍhitavyo piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo

§ 39.14.31B2. vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha.” tehi āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapāto ukkaḍḍhayitavyo. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikakalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo

§ 39.26.32A4. pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo

§ 39.26.32A4. vaktavyaṃ “grāmāntikānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ parigṛhṇatha” tti

§ 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ

§ 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.” (≒ § 50.2.43A4)

§ 50.1.43A2. so dāni bhikṣu piṇḍapātasya kṛtena praviṣṭo

§ 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ

§ 50.4.43A6. piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo, vaktavyam “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyantaṃ.” ti

§ 50.5.43A7. dāyakadānapatī vaktavyāḥ “detha glānasya piṇḍapātaṃ.”

§ 50.7.43B3. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ. atha khalu ubhaye piṇḍapātā nīharttavyā

§ 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye dehi.” atha khalu tūṣṇīkena uddeśe sthātavyaṃ

§ 58.4.48A4. a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti

§ 59.5.48B2. ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mama piṇḍapātam ukkaḍḍhesi”

§ 60.5.48B7. ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi”usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍapātaka~#

piṇḍapātaka~#

“Almosenspeise”

⇒ piṇḍa-pāta~, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~

§ 50.1.43A2. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato

§ 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto

§ 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ... vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ

§ 52.5.44B3. atha dāni upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā piṇḍapātako bhavati, ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati, sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pīṭhaka~

pīṭhikā~

“Schemel”

☞ § 23.6.1, Anm. 1

⇒ jentāka-pīṭhikā~

§ 8.5.9A1. prasrāvakumbhikā nikkālayitavyā pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā

§ 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā ...

§ 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ ...

§ 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ ...

§ 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti, anāpattiḥ

§ 42.11.36B5. jentāke pīṭhikā vā śuktikāyo vā dhovitavyā usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

√pīḍ

√pīḍ

⇒ antara-pīḍita~, ā-pīḍaya-, ut-pīḍita~, up-pīḍita~, up-pīḍaya-, up-pīlita~, niṣ-pīḍaya-, prapīḍita~

§ 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhovitavyaṃ pīḍiya ātape śoṣayitavyaṃ

§ 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano dhoviya pīḍiya tatra͡iva sthapitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍapāta-nīhāraka~ (Pā);

piṇḍapāta-nīhāraka~ (Pā);

vgl. BHS. piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka (s. BHSD, s.v. nirhāraka)

⇒ piṇḍapātahāraka~, nīhāra-piṇḍapāta~, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~, nīhāraka-piṇḍapāta~, nīhārikapiṇḍapāta~

☞ § 50.2, Anm. 3, § 50.3, Anm. 1

(1) “das Herausbringen/Mitbringen von Almosenspeise”#

§ 50.2.43A4. evaṃ ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi

(2) “jemand, der Almosenspeise herausbringt/mitbringt” (= Pā)

§ 50.3.43A5. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nīhārikapiṇḍapātena piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ

§ 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ

§ 50.3.43A6. evaṃ piṇḍapātanīhārakena (Hs. °pātenī°) pratipadyitavyaṃ;

vgl. § 50.11.43B7. evaṃ piṇḍapātahārakena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1)

§ 50.4.43A6. nimantraṇam bhavati, bhikṣu jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, na pratibalo gantuṃ, piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo

§ 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ

§ 50.10.43B6. piṇḍapātanīhārako ca cireṇa āgacchati, kālo ca stokāvaśeṣo bhavati, nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ

§ 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ

§ 50.10.43B7. atha dāni dūre saṃghārāmo bhavati, piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatra͡iva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatra͡iva bhuṃjitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍapāta-hāraka~#

piṇḍikā~

“Kügelchen”

⇒ gomaya-piṇḍikā~

§ 42.20.37A4. cūrṇṇaṃ ... piṇḍikam vā vaṭṭiya (Hs. paṭṭiya) dātavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

piṇḍe- (Pā)

piṇḍe- (Pā)

“anhäufen”;

< Skt. piṇḍayati

§ 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha”

比丘威儀法詞典

pitṛ~

pi-tha- (BHS, SWTF)

“zuschließen”;

< Skt. api-√dhā; vgl. Pā. pithīyati

⇒ pi-the-, pi-√dhā

§ 13.17.12B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati vihāro pi{t}thitvā sthapituṃ

§ 51.8.44A4. yadi tāva śilāpūrakāṃ pithiyāṇaṃ (Hs. piṣiy°) ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā dāsyati”

§ 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pi-the- (BHS)

pi-the- (BHS)

“verhüllen”;

< Skt. api-√dhā

⇒ pi-tha-, pi-√dhā

§ 29.5.24B3. atha dāni jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, śīrṣam vā duḥkhati, arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ eko ca karṇṇo

比丘威儀法詞典

pi-√dhā (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

pi-√dhā (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

“zuschließen”;

< Skt. api-√dhā

⇒ pi-tha-, pi-the-

§ 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ (Hs. pivi°) cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ

§ 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi

§ 61.6.49A6. cīvarakarṇṇakena mukhaṃ pidhiya sukhākaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ

§ 61.7.49A7. cīvarakoṇena mukhaṃ pidhiya saṃprajānena vijṛmbhayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pipāsita~

pipāsita~

“durstig”

§ 41.15.34B5. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ tasya dārakasyâha “haṃgho dāraka, pipāsito ’smi. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ.”

比丘威儀法詞典

piba-

piba-

⇒ √pā-, pīta~

§ 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ ... upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti

§ 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti

§ 18.53.17B3. pibāhi, yadi ’si jīvitukāmo

§ 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si

§ 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha

§ 32.6.27B2. dhūpam vā pibantasya (☞ § 32.6, Anm. 6), akṣiṇī vā añjantasya, ...

§ 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ

§ 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pibati

§ 41.15.34B6. senāpati pibāhi

§ 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pibana~ (BHS)

pibana~ (BHS)

“das Trinken”

☞ § 39.15, Anm. 1

⇒ bhuñjana~

§ 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti

§ 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ

§ 40.8.33A1. tato pibanāye dātavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pilipilāpa-#

pihitvā

⇒ pi-√dhā

比丘威儀法詞典

pīṭha~

pīṭha~

“Sitz, Schemel”

⇒ pīṭhaka~, jentāka-pīṭha~, mañca-pīṭha~

§ 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ondriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ ... (≒ § 16.2.14A6)

§ 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ}

§ 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti, muṃjā karttitavyā ... (≒ § 12.18.12A5, § 13.11.12B3)

§ 12.18.12A5. muñjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā, tato mañcā ca pīṭhā ca vuṇitavyā (≒ § 15.8.14A4)

§ 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāñ ca mañcā prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ

§ 12.12.11B7. āyuṣman amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ

§ 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ...

§ 13.11.12B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā

§ 14.7.13A6. maṃcasya upari pīṭhā sthāpayitavyā. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ ... pīṭhasya upari sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 14.16.13B4~5. mañcasya upari pīṭhaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ. pīṭhasyôpari yaṃ tatra jarjarabisi vā jarjaracaturaśrako vā taṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā

§ 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 23.4.1.21A7. nâyaṃ kṣamati tahiṃ maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā praveśituṃ

§ 23.4.1.21A7. pīṭhaṃ praveśeti. pīṭhasyâpi evaṃ yyeva

§ 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ (Hs. ryāṇaṃ) ca sāpāśrayā ca

§ 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

puggalika~ (Pā)

puggalika~ (Pā)

“persönlich”;

vgl. BHS, SWTF. paudgalika

☞ § 11.11, Anm. 4

§ 11.11.11A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

-puṭa~ (BHS)

-puṭa~ (BHS)

⇒ upānaha-puṭa~

§ 11.8.11A1. yadi tāva kambalasya bhavati, ekapuṭaṃ vā dvipuṭam vā karttavyaṃ. atha dāni karpāsasya bhavati dvipuṭaṃ (Hs. °ṭā) vā tripuṭaṃ (Hs. °ṭā) vā karttavyaṃ

§ 25.15.23A2. prasevikā karttavyā dupuṭā tṛpuṭā

比丘威儀法詞典

puṭikā~

puṭikā~

⇒ āviddha-puṭikā~

比丘威儀法詞典

puṇya~

puṇya~

“Verdienst”

⇒ kṛta-puṇya~, mahā-puṇya~

§ 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs)

§ 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi (Loc. pl.) niveśayamāno

比丘威儀法詞典

puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~ (°phala-upa°) (SWTF)

puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~ (°phala-upa°) (SWTF)

§ 4.16.5B3. yathākarmma gamiṣyanti puṇyapāpaphalopagāḥ (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

puṇya-bhāgiya~#

puṇya-bhāgiya~#

“zum Erwerb von Verdienst vorbestimmt”

☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1

⇒ -bhāgiya~, -bhāgīya~, phala-bhāgiya~, vāsanā-bhāgīya~

§ 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno

比丘威儀法詞典

putra~

putra~

⇒ itikitikāya-putra~, kula-putra~, rāja-putra~, vāta-putra~

§ 4.20.6A2. putram vā paśum vā ārabhya (vs)

§ 41.12.34B1. tasya dāni eko putro acirajāto

§ 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi

§ 41.21.35A5. anyo ’sau ... bhavati agrakulikasya putro

比丘威儀法詞典

putraka~

putraka~

⇒ eka-putraka~, kula-putraka~

比丘威儀法詞典

puna (Pā);

puna (Pā);

vgl. Pkt. puṇa

⇒ punar, puno

§ 3.5.3B2. bhante katamâdya? ... katamā puna hiyo ’bhūṣi?

§ 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati

比丘威儀法詞典

punar

punar

⇒ puna, puno, ko punar vvādo

§ 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi

§ 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.”;

vgl. § 8.7.9A5. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi

§ 54.2.46A2. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati

§ 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati (Hs. khanati), ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ

§ 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti

比丘威儀法詞典

puno (Pā)

puno (Pā)

⇒ puna, punar, bhūyo

§ 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.”;

vgl. § 52.6.44B6. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>

§ 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi

§ 40.12.33A5. puno vā nirmmādayitavyaṃ

§ 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ

§ 59.5.48B2. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ ...

§ 59.6.48B3. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣivikā āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ

§ 60.5.48B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ khajjanako bhavati, puno puno kaṇḍūyati, ...

§ 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... (= § 61.6.49A6)

§ 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ

§ 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ... (= § 62.9.50A5, § 62.10.50A6)

§ 62.8.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vātakarmma puno <puno> āgacchati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

purato (Pā)

purato (Pā)

< Skt. puratas

§ 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ

§ 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa

§ 18.9.15B7. varccakuṭīye purato kuṭī vā śālā vā karttavyā

§ 18.44.17A5. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena purato parāṅmukhena sthātavyaṃ

§ 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito

§ 27.2.23B5. tvaṃ dāni tasya purato āgacchiya sthito

§ 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi

§ 27.3.23B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhituṃ

§ 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti

§ 28.3.24A3. nâyan tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramituṃ

§ 28.8.24A4. tan na kṣamati purato samaṃ vā gantuṃ. ohayitvā gantavyaṃ

§ 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto

§ 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā

§ 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukaṃ purato ābhāsayitvâcchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

purastima~

purastima~

“östlich”

§ 4.19.6A1. sarvvā diśā subhayā samākulā sa uttarā sa purastimā (vs)

§ 18.3.15B2. varccakuṭīṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa vā kārāpayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

purima~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

purima~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

“vorderer; früher, erster”

§ 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati

§ 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ ... sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ

§ 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ (☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1) pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-cchādaya-

prati-jāgrīya-#

“wach bleiben”; wörtl. “es wird dafür gesorgt, wach zu bleiben” (?)

☞ § 53.4, Anm.2

⇒ prati-√jāgṛ, prati-jāgara-

§ 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

purima-paścimaka~#

pure-śramaṇa~#

“ein (dem Begleiter) vorangehender Mönch”;

vgl. Pā. pure-samaṇa

☞ § 49.3,Anm. 1

⇒ paścāc-chramaṇa~

§ 49.3.42A6. evaṃ pureśramaṇena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 49.10.43A1, Uddāna [VI].45A1)

§ 49.5.42A7. tenâpi dāni pureśramaṇena nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ

§ 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

puro-kṛtya~#

puro-kṛtya~#

“das Bereitlegen (für das nächste Mal)” (?);

< Skt. puras + √kṛ (“vornhin stellen,voranstellen usw.”)

§ 43.16.38B5. purokṛtyaṃ sukhaṃ bhaviṣyati

比丘威儀法詞典

puro-bhaktam

puro-bhaktam

⇒ pure-bhaktam

比丘威儀法詞典

puro-bhaktika~

puro-bhaktika~

⇒ pure-bhaktika~

比丘威儀法詞典

puro-bhakte

puro-bhakte

⇒ pure-bhaktam

比丘威儀法詞典

pulaka~

pulaka~

⇒ tṛṇa-pulaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

puṣkiriṇī~ (BHS, SWTF)

puṣkiriṇī~ (BHS, SWTF)

“Teich”;

vgl. Skt. puṣkariṇī

§ 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Vārāṇasyāṃ Buddhavicīrṇṇā nāma puṣkiriṇī

§ 42.21.37A7. atha dāni ogho vā puṣkiriṇī vā taḍāgo vā bhavati, ...

§ 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

puṣkiriṇī-kūla~#

puṣkiriṇī-kūla~#

“Ufer eines Teiches”

§ 52.9.44B7. nadīkūle vā udupānakūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle (Hs. °kule) vā āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ

§ 57.11.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

puṣpa~

puṣpa~

§ 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6)

§ 3.7.3B5. vibhavo bhavati śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyā puṣpehi okiritavyā

§ 8.12.9B1. āgatasya samānasya hastanirmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ, puṣpāṇi dātavyāni

§ 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, gandho sajjayitavyo

§ 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... klinnakāni vā puṣpāṇi praticchituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

puṣpa-rasa~

puṣpa-rasa~

“Saft von Blumen”

§ 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

puṣpopagata~#

puṣpopagata~#

“mit Blumen versehen, blühend”

§ 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi

比丘威儀法詞典

pustaka~

pustaka~

“Buch”

☞ § 8.10, Anm. 2

§ 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ, pustako nayitavyo, kuṇḍikā nayitavyā

§ 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ, pustako (Hs. prastako) ānayitavyo, kuṇḍikā ānayitavyā ...

§ 32.6.27B2. pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pūjita~

pūjita~

“angebetet”

§ 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā .. satkṛto gurukṛto mānitaḥ pūjitaḥ apacāyito ...

比丘威儀法詞典

*pūti-karmman~

*pūti-karmman~

⇒ pūti-vāta-karmman~

比丘威儀法詞典

*pūti-mūtra~

*pūti-mūtra~

“stinkender Urin”;

vgl. BHS. pūti-mukta, Pā. pūti-mutta

☞ § 19.42, Anm. 1

§ 19.42.19A3. atha dāni glāno bhavati bhikṣuḥ pāṇḍurogeṇa, vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ (Hs. pratim°) pibanāya dethê”tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ?

比丘威儀法詞典

pūti-vāta-karmman~#

pūti-vāta-karmman~#

“übelriechender Wind; Blähung”;

vgl. Skt. pūti-vāta (“Blähung”), vātakarman(dass.)

§ 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo bhavati, eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti

§ 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ (Hs. pratikarmmaṃ) aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? ...”

比丘威儀法詞典

pūra~

pūra~

⇒ pātra-pūra~, pūrṇṇa~

§ 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ ... acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ udakasya pūrāṃ

§ 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā udakasya pūrā{ṃ}

§ 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pūrakā̆~

pūrṇṇa~

⇒ pūra~

§ 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa

比丘威儀法詞典

pūrvva~

pūrvva~

§ 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī ... na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pūrvva-praviṣṭa~#

pūrvva-praviṣṭa~#

“früher eingetreten”

§ 18.20.16A7. tahiṃ ca aparo bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo

§ 18.22.16B1. yadi tāva tahi koci pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati tena pratyacchaṭikā karttavyā (≒ § 19.8.18A2)

§ 19.6.17B7. tahiṃ ca bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo praśvāsaṃ karoti

§ 41.25.35B2. yadi tāva koci bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

pūrvvaṃ-bhaktam#

pūrvvaṃ-bhaktam#

“vor der Mahlzeit; am Vormittag”;

vgl. SWTF, s.v. pūrvabhaktam, °bhakte

⇒ pure-bhaktam, pure-bhakte, puro-bhaktam, paścād-bhaktam

§ 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kiṃ pūrvvaṃbhaktaṃ, kiṃ paścādbhaktaṃ?

比丘威儀法詞典

√pṛcch

√pṛcch

⇒ prati-√pṛcch, ā-√pṛcch

§ 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti

§ 3.1.3A6. dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) pṛcchanti (= § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7)

§ 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” (≒ § 4.2.4A7)

§ 2.1.2B1. te dāni pṛcchanti “ārya samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?”

§ 2.9.3A1. tato dāyakadānapatī pṛcchitavyāḥ

§ 3.10.4A1. dāyakadānapati pṛcchitavyāḥ

§ 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “kinnāmako ’si? kiṅgotrako ’si?” (= § 6.5.7B2)

§ 4.5.4B3. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiyāṇaṃ tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2)

§ 5.5.6B2. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiya tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ

§ 8.4.8B7. vanditvā sukhaśayitaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyo)

§ 8.7.9A4. nānāvarṇṇitaṃ bhavati, pṛcchitavyo “suvihita, kuto idaṃ labdhaṃ?”

§ 10.4.10A5. antevāsinā ... ācāryasya sukharātri pṛcchitavyā

§ 18.40.17A3. nâpi kṣamati taruṇikā pṛcchituṃ, mā veḍḍā bhaveya tti

§ 20.5.19B1. bhagavān jānanto yeva pṛcchati (= § 23.2.21A5, § 24.2.22A1, § 43.1.38A2)

§ 26.2.23A6. te dāni śabdāpitāḥ, etad eva pṛcchiyanti (Passiv; vgl. BHSG § 37.9)

§ 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?”

§ 38.5.30A7. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti

§ 41.14.34B4. te dāni pṛcchanti

§ 41.16.34B6. so dāni pṛcchati

§ 41.18.35A1. tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati

§ 52.6.44B4. “suvihita, kuto imaṃ?” ti pṛcchitavyousw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pṛthivī~

pṛthivī~

“Fußboden”

§ 18.35.16B7. yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, uttatthapitavyā

§ 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā

§ 19.15.18A5. atha dāni kṛta{ṃ}karmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovayitavyā

§ 19.33.18B6. atha dāni kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovitavyā

§ 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo (≒ § 19.33.18B6)

比丘威儀法詞典

pṛthivī-pradeśa~ (SWTF, SJW)

pṛṣṭhatas

§ 8.6.9A2. ātmano cīvarakaṃ gṛhṇiya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ

§ 8.12.9B1. cetiyaṃ vandantasya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ

§ 18.44.17A5. utkṣiptarathyāyāṃ kuḍyaṃ pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā uśvāso karttavyo

§ 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena

§ 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyācāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ

§ 28.4.24A3. nâpi kṣamati stūpam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ, upādhyāyācāryam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ

§ 28.8.24A5. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ

§ 29.7.24B4. na kṣamati stūpaṃ pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, saṃgham vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariya niṣīdituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato (Hs. pṛṣṭato) karīya niṣīdituṃ

§ 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati tena dūraṃ pṛṣṭhato gantuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pṛṣṭhima~ (BHS[Mvu])

pṛṣṭhima~ (BHS[Mvu])

“hinter”

§ 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati

§ 41.5.34A2. so dāni praduṣṭacitto sthavirasya pṛṣṭhimena pṛṣṭhimaṃ anubaddho

比丘威儀法詞典

√pr̥̄

√pr̥̄

⇒ pūraya-, pūre-, pūrṇṇa~, o-pūraya-, o-pūre-, pari-pūraya~

比丘威儀法詞典

pe (BHS, Pā)

Petaleya~#

ein sonst nicht belegter Ortsname

☞ § 40.8, Anm. 4

§ 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Śrāvastyāṃ Petaleyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

peyā~ (Skt)

peyā~ (Skt)

“Reisschleim”

☞ § 8.5, Anm. 7

⇒ a-peyya~

§ 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für pāyitā?) peyāpātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

*peyā-pātra~

*peyā-pātra~

“Reisschleimschale”

§ 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für pāyitā?) pe<yā>pātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

peyālaṃ (BHS, SWTF)

peyya~

⇒ a-peyya~

比丘威儀法詞典

pelava~

pelava~

“zart, weich”

§ 26.1.23A4. (yavāgū~ ...) yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā (Hs. tpala{ṃ}vā) bhavati, jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāvāgu ...” (☞ § 26.1 [Text], Anm. 3)

比丘威儀法詞典

peśala~

potaka~

⇒ āmra-potaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

potta-khaṇḍa~#

poṣa~ (BHS)

“Person, Mensch”;

vgl. SWTF, s.v.; BLSF I 233, Anm. 276; vgl. auch Pā. poso, Norman CP III 86f.

§ 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

poṣadha

poṣadha

“Poṣadha”;

term.techn. zur Bez. einer Feier im Saṃgha;

vgl. BHSD s. vv. poṣadha, upoṣadha, posatha, SWTF, s.v. poṣatha; Poṣ(Hu) 1ff.

⇒ divā-poṣadha~, rātri-poṣadha~, sandhi-poṣadha~

§ 1.1.1B1. saṃghasya dāni poṣadho (= § 2.1.2A7, § 2.3.2B3)

§ 1.3.1B3. evaṃ nāma saṃghasya poṣadho

§ 1.4.1B4. evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 1.14.2A7, Uddāna [I])

§ 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyati?

§ 1.11.2A4. bhikṣusaṃgho tāva poṣadhaṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.9.3A2)

§ 3.6.3B3. eṣo dāni saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ...

§ 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā divā <vā> rātrau vā poṣadho (Hs. °dhe) usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

poṣadha-sthāna~#

poṣadha-sthāna~#

“Platz für die Poṣadha-Feier”

§ 1.8.1B7. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ sanmārjayitavyaṃ gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 2.6.2B6)

§ 3.7.3B5. tena prakṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

paudgalika-paribhoga~#

paudgalika-paribhoga~#

“persönlicher Gebrauch”

☞ § 11.12, Anm. 1

§ 11.12.11A3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paudgalikaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pt / st:

prakaraṇa~

§ 18.2.15B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣūhi śrutaṃ (= § 19.2.17B5, § 19.6.18A1, § 20.1.19A6, § 40.1.32B3, § 45.1.39B4, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 48.1.41A4 usw.)

§ 1.2.1B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu/°eṃsuḥ (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2.6A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 22.1.20B7, § 41.1.33B4 usw.)

§ 2.2.2B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayanti

§ 3.2.3B1. bhikṣū etam prakaraṇaṃ ārocayanti

§ 25.1.22B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so bhikṣuḥ bhagavato ārocaye

§ 27.1.23B4. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so yogācāro bhagavato ārocaye (= § 28.1.24A1) usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-kāśita~

pra-kāśita~

“erläutert”

Antaroddāna 50B2.

saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-kīrṇṇa~

pra-√kṣip

“hineinwerfen, hinstecken”

§ 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ

§ 18.17.16A5. kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ

§ 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, uccikāye tahiṃ sarvvaṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābutumbako vā thapayitavyo. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ. na dāni tahi kṣamati uccāro vā kheṭasiṃghāṇako vā prakṣipituṃ

§ 25.8.22B5. atha khalu pātraprasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiya sthapetavyaṃ. nâpi kṣamati sthitakena prakṣipituṃ. atha khalu upaviṣṭakena prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena (Passiv mit aktiver Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.22f.) kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ. mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 39.6.31A3. <yā> grāmāntikānāṃ thālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ

§ 39.6.31A3. yā āraṇyakānāṃ thālī ... tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ

§ 39.7.31A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ

§ 39.7.31A4. prakṣipatha taṇḍulāni

§ 39.19.31B6~7. yā āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ

§ 39.20.31B7~32A1. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, na kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāṃ prakṣipituṃ. ... yadi tāva āgacchanti teṣāṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyā

§ 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā

§ 40.11.33A4. na dāni atibahu oṣṭha prakṣipitavyā

§ 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ upānahāhi (Loc. pl.; Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya ...

§ 41.2.33B5. ārdrapādāṃ upānahāsu prakṣipiya ...

§ 41.29.35B6. adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ upānahāyāṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ agnau prakṣipiya ...

§ 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ

§ 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti

§ 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-khala-#

pra-khala-#

“straucheln”;

< Skt. pra-√skhal

⇒ uk-khala-

§ 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā

比丘威儀法詞典

pragalbha~

pragalbha~

⇒ a-pragalbha~

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-gṛhṇā-

pra-gṛhṇā-

“entgegennehmen”

§ 36.6.29B5. anāgārā pragṛhṇanti pratissayavinodanā<ṃ> (Hs. pratisaṃya{mya}v°) (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-gopaya-

pra-gopaya-

“verbergen; unter Kontrolle halten”

§ 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-ghuṣṭa~#

pracālaya-

⇒ pracalāya-

比丘威儀法詞典

√prach

√prach

⇒ √pṛcch, ā-√pṛcch, pari-√pṛcch

比丘威儀法詞典

pracchanna-prākaṭa~#

pra-juha-#

“(Feuer) anzünden”;

< Skt. pra-√hu (“als Opfer hingeben”)

⇒ ā-juha-

§ 42.19.37A3. na dāni kṣamati tehi agni prajuhitvā ... prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi

比丘威儀法詞典

prajña~

prajñaptaka~ (BHS)

“bereitet, hergerichtet, aufgestellt”;

< prajñapta + Suffix ka

§ 48.4.41A7. āsanaṃ bhavati ... karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati

§ 56.5.47A5. rātriñ ca śayyāsanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ āsati, nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ kṛtvā gantuṃ. atha khalu yathā{khalu}prajñaptakaṃ dviguṇīkṛtvā tato gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prajñapti~

prajñapti~

⇒ āsana-prajñapti~

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-√jñā

pra-√jñā

§ 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu “na͡iva saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ prajñāyate na gatiḥ”

§ 1.3.1B4. na͡iva saṃghasthavirasyâgatir nna gatiḥ prajñāyate (≒ § 4.3.4B1)

§ 4.2.4A7. na͡iva saṃghasthavirasya āgatir ggatiḥ prajñāyati (Passiv mit der transitiven Endung)

比丘威儀法詞典

prajñāpaka~

prajñāpaka~

⇒ śayyāsana-prajñāpaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-jñāpaya-

pra-jñāpaya-

⇒ pra-jñapaya-

比丘威儀法詞典

prajñāvaitakṣiyā

prajñāvaitakṣiyā

Verschreibung?

☞ § 39.29, Anm. 2

§ 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ prajñāvaitakṣiyā. śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. ...”

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-jvala-

praṇāma~

“Verbeugung”

§ 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo

§ 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praṇāli-bhrama~#

praṇāli-bhrama~#

“Abfluß”

⇒ pranāḍikā-bhrama~

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-ṇīta~ (BHS, SWTF)

pra-ṇīta~ (BHS, SWTF)

“vorzüglich”;

vgl. Pā. paṇīta

§ 52.5.44B4. sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ, lūhaṃ ca praṇītaṃ ca ekañ ca aparaṃ ca

比丘威儀法詞典

praṇīta-taraka~#

praṇīta-taraka~#

“vorzüglicher”

§ 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praṇīta-bhojana~ (BHS, SWTF)

praṇīta-bhojana~ (BHS, SWTF)

“vorzügliche Speise”;

vgl. Pā. paṇīta-bhojana

§ 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ...

比丘威儀法詞典

praṇetavya~

praṇetavya~

§ 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-dinna~#

prati-dinna~#

“(eine Strafe ist) verhängt” oder “(eine Strafe ist) aufgehoben”?

☞ § 26.6, Anm. 1

§ 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ (lies: dinnaṃ?) bhavati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

prati / pari

prati-√kāṅkṣ

“erwarten”

§ 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” pratikṛty’ eva (BHS) “schon vorher, im Voraus”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. pratikṛtya (“in advance”), Pā. paṭikacca, paṭigacca

☞ § 1.8, Anm. 2

⇒ prakṛty’ eva, prakṛtya͡iva

§ 1.8.1B6. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ

§ 4.8.4B7~5A1. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva āgantavyaṃ

§ 4.11.5A2. oheyyakānāṃ glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ

§ 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya tāva pratikṛty’ eva agniharaṇī karttavyā ...

§ 14.15.13B4. pratikṛty’ eva tāva yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam ... sthāpayitavyaṃ

§ 18.49.17A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pratikṛty’ eva nivāsanaṃ oguhiya gacchituṃ

§ 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ ...

§ 34.4.28B4. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ (= § 35.4.29A4)

§ 35.3.29A3. ye tahiṃ brāhmaṇamahattarakā bhavanti, te pratikṛty’ eva upasaṃkramitavyā

§ 37.3.30A2. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva vṛddhatarakā pratisaritavyā

§ 39.1.30B6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ

§ 39.2.31A1. tathā tumhehiṃ pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha

§ 39.3.31A1. pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ

§ 39.5.31A3. pratikṛty’ eva (Hs. eca) gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ

§ 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ

§ 42.2.36A2. te ... pratikṛty’ eva gacchiya jentākaṃ prajvālīya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā āsanti

§ 45.7.40A2. pratikṛty’ eva tāva rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ

§ 46.4.40A6. pratikṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ

§ 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-√kram

prati-√kram

⇒ prati-krānta~, prati-kramāpaya-, prati-krāmaya-, prati-saṃ-√kram

(1) “zurückkehren”

§ 45.7.40A2. eṣo bhikṣu vikāle pratikramati, nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ

(2) “sich zurückziehen, zur Ruhe gehen”

☞ § 15.9, Anm. 3

§ 15.9.14A4. āstaraṇaṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ

§ 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ, tato pratikramitavyaṃ

§ 31.25.26B1. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ

(3) “stehenbleiben” (= prati-saṃ-√kram, pari-√kram)

☞ § 52.1, Anm. 3

§ 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā {saṃbahulā} bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ...

Vgl. § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkramati

§ 52.1.44B1. te pi dāni bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti

§ 52.1.44B1. ime pi bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti

§ 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ

§ 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pratikramaṇa~

pratikramaṇa~

“Rückkehr”#;

vgl. Pā. paṭikkamana

☞ § 18.39, Anm. 2

§ 18.39.17A2. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ. pratikramaṇam vâgantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-kramāpaya-#

prati-kramāpaya-#

“zur Ruhe gehen lassen”;

vgl. Pā. paṭikkamāpeti

⇒ prati-krāmaya-

§ 8.12.9B2. sukhaṃ pratikramāpayitavyaṃ, uddiśitvā vā paripṛcchitvā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-krānta~

prati-krānta~

“zurückgekehrt, zurückgekommen”

§ 41.4.34A1. prāsādikena abhikrāntena pratikrāntena ālokitavilokitena sammiñjitaprasāritena saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇena

§ 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-krāmaya-#

prati-krāmaya-#

“zur Ruhe gehen lassen”

⇒ prati-kramāpaya-

§ 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-kṣipta~

prati-kṣipta~

“verboten”

§ 20.5.19B1. bhagavatā dantakāṣṭhaṃ pratikṣiptaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-gupta~

prati-gupta~

§ 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-√grah

prati-√grah

§ 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi

比丘威儀法詞典

pratigraha~

pratigrāhaka~

“Empfänger”

§ 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-grāhaya-

prati-grāhaya-

“empfangen lassen; geben”

☞ § 18.53, Anm. 6

⇒ prati-grahāpaya-, pratigrāhāpaya-

§ 19.42.19A4. purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ, tataḥ paścāt pratigrāhayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-grāhāpaya-

prati-grāhāpaya-

⇒ prati-grahāpaya-

比丘威儀法詞典

pratigrāhya~

pratigrāhya~

⇒ a-pratigrāhya~

比丘威儀法詞典

praticora~#

praticora~#

“Gegner eines Diebs; feindlicher Dieb”

§ 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ harāma, praticorehi pi muṣyema, grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema, ...

§ 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, praticorehi vā vayaṃ muṣyema, grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema

比丘威儀法詞典

praticcha- (BHS)

praticcha- (BHS)

“entgegennehmen”;

< Skt. prati-√iṣ

⇒ paṭiccha-, pratīccha-

§ 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati, ko praticchiṣyati, ... (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6)

§ 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” ... tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā

§ 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ praticcheṣyasi

§ 2.8.3A1. śalākāṃ pi praticchantena na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena ... śalākāṃ praticchituṃ (≒ § 3.9.4A1)

§ 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi”

§ 26.5.23A7~23B1. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū upānahārūḍhena vā praticchituṃ, oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā samaṃtaprāvṛtena vā praticchituṃ, ... ekāṃsakṛtena yavāgū praticchitavyā

§ 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo

§ 26.10.23B3. yaṃ kālaṃ praticchitā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyā

§ 39.10.31A7. vaktavyaṃ “vayaṃ pi na praticchāmê”tti

§ 39.22.32A1. vaktavyaṃ “vayaṃ pi na praticchāmo” nti

§ 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... ukkhīṇaka vā taṇḍulā praticchituṃ, klinnakāni vā puṣpāṇi praticchituṃ, kṣudrapākāni vā phalāni praticchituṃ

§ 52.8.44B7. yadi koci nimantreti, yadi arthiko bhavati, praticchitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-padya-

prati-padya-

⇒ prati-padyitavya~, prati-panna~

§ 1.14.2A7. na pratipadyati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 4.21.6A4, § 5.14.7A4, § 7.8.8B5, § 10.6.10A7 usw.)

§ 32.13.27B6. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati (= § 33.17.28A7, § 34.8.28B6, § 35.8.29A6, § 37.7.30A5 usw.)

§ 57.13.48A1. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 58.7.48A6, § 62.13.50B1)

§ 31.38.27A3. na pratipadyanti, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmaṃti

§ 8.14.9B4. na pratipadyate, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati

§ 2.12.3A6. na pratipadyeti (vgl. BHSG § 38.21, S. 219, s.v. pad-) abhisamācārikāṃ dharmmān atikramati (= § 22.8.21A4)

§ 3.13.4A4. na pratipadyanti vinayātikramam āsādayanti

§ 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ, katham ācārye p°, kathaṃ vṛddhatarake p°, kathaṃ saṃghamadhye p°, kathaṃ grāme pratipattavyaṃ, kathaṃ āraṇye pratipattavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-padyitavya~#

prati-padyitavya~#

“zu verfahren; sich zu verhalten”;

vgl. Pā. paṭipajjitabba

⇒ prati-padya-, pratipanna~

§ 1.4.1B4. tena hi evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 1.14.2A7. evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ, katham ācārye p°, kathaṃ vṛddhatarake p°, kathaṃ saṃghamadhye p°, kathaṃ grāme pratipattavyaṃ, kathaṃ āraṇye pratipattavyaṃ ... kathaṃ saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇe p° (≒ § 9.1.9B5)

§ 12.16.12A3. vṛddhehi saṃstaraṇe pratipadyitavyaṃ (“erhalten”?)

§ 19.7.18A1. tena hi evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 19.43. evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ ... p° ... p° ... p° ... evaṃ dantakāṣṭhe p° ti

§ 20.20.20A5. evaṃ dantakāṣṭhe pratipadyitavyaṃ

Uddāna (II).20A5. evaṃ śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 39.4.31A2. evaṃ āraṇyake vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 39.4.31A2. evaṃ grāmāntike vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 40.17.33B2)

§ 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pādadhovanīye pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 41.3.33B6. evaṃ dhovitapādehi pratipadyitavyaṃ ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1)

§ 42.6.36B1. evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 42.32.38A1)

§ 42.6.36B1. evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 42.6.36B2, § 42.32.38A1)

§ 43.2.38A2. evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 43.2.38A3)

§ 43.17.38B5. evaṃ bhāṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 44.3.39A1. evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 44.12.39B1)

Uddāna (V).39B2~3. evam araṇye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ grāmāntike pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ paridhovaniye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā; evaṃ pādadhovanike pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 45.8.40A3. evaṃ nivāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 47.1.40B4. katham ... cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A6)

§ 47.2.40B5. kathaṃ ... cīvarake pratipadyitavyaṃ

§ 47.3.40B6. evaṃ ... cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 47.10.41A2, § 48.3.41A6, § 48.10.41B5) usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

pratipadā~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā)

prati-√pṛcch

§ 8.5.9A1. uddiśitvā pratipṛcchitvā kheṭakaṭāhako nikkālayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

pratibaddha~

pratibaddha~

⇒ para-pratibaddha~

比丘威儀法詞典

pratibala~

pratibhaya~

“gefährlich”

§ 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pratibhāna~

pratibhāna~

⇒ niṣ-pratibhāna~

比丘威儀法詞典

pratibhānaka~

pratibhānaka~

⇒ yathā-pratibhānakaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-mānita~

prati-mānita~

§ 4.18.6A1. bhoja<ne>nā vastupālā satkṛtā pratimānitā (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-√labh

prati-√labh

§ 11.1.10B3. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atīva udārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti (≒ § 12.1.11A6)

比丘威儀法詞典

pratiliptaka~#

pratiliptaka~#

“beschmiert”

⇒ mṛttikā-praliptikā~

§ 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-√vas

prativeśika~#

“Nachbar”;

vgl. BHS. prativeśaka

⇒ prativeśi-kula~

§ 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prativeśi-kula~#

pratiśraya~

“Obdach”

§ 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena

§ 31.8.25B6. ācikṣitavyaṃ “labdho pratiśrayo”

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-ṣṭhāpaya-

prati-ṣṭhāpaya-

“hinstellen, aufstellen; darbringen; emporheben”

§ 1.1.1B2. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāma

§ 1.11.2A3. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyaṃ (≒ § 2.9.3A2)

§ 2.1.2B1~2. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāmo ... deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayi-ṣyāmaḥ ... deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitvā gatāḥ

§ 3.1.3A7. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāmaḥ

§ 3.10.4A2. deyadharmma pratiṣṭhāpayitavyo deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyo

§ 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā ... (≒ § 30.7.25A4)

§ 62.1.49B2~3. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno (Kaus. mit medialer Endung) ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpayamāno ...

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-ṣṭhita~

prati-ṣṭhita~

§ 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pratisaṃyukta~

pratisaṃyukta~

“Abschnitt”

☞ § 4.19, Anm. 2

⇒ pātra-pratisaṃyukta~

比丘威儀法詞典

pratisaṃlayana-sāropya~ (BHS)

pratisaṃlayana-sāropya~ (BHS)

“für einsame Meditation geeignet”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. pratisaṃ-layana; SWTF. pratisaṃlayana-sārūpya, Pā. paṭisallāna-sāruppa

§ 39.29.32A7. (āraṇyakā) ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...”

比丘威儀法詞典

pratisaṃlīnaka~#

pratisaṃlīnaka~#

“zurückgezogen”;

< BHS. pratisaṃlīna + Suffix ka;

Pā. paṭisallīna

§ 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ekānte bhavati ucchedake vā vṛkṣamūlake vā vihāre vā pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-saṃ-√vid

prati-saṃ-√vid

Kaus. “mitteilen, verkünden”

⇒ a-pratisaṃviditena, a-pratisaṃviditvā, pratisaṃviditena

比丘威儀法詞典

pratisaṃviditena

pratisaṃskāra~ (BHS)

“Reparatur”

⇒ pratisaṃskāraṇa~

§ 14.11.13B1. evaṃ hy eva sarvvaṃ pratisaṃskāro karttavyaḥ yāva śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā

§ 14.13.13B2. yathā sarvva pratisaṃskāraṃ (Hs. °kāro) gacche (☞ § 14.13, Anm. 1) tathā dātavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

pratisaṃskāraṇa~ (BHS)

pratisaṃskāraṇa~ (BHS)

“Reparatur”

⇒ pratisaṃskāra~

§ 12.14.12A2. pratisaṃskāraṇārthaṃ eṣo ca{ṃ} uddiśīyati

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-saṃ-s-kāraya- (BHS)

prati-saṃ-s-kāraya- (BHS)

“reparieren; instand halten”

⇒ prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-, prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ

§ 13.5.12B1. mūṣikokkārā vā cikkhallikā vā pratisaṃskārayitavyā

§ 15.10.14A4. yadi sarvvarātro gacchati pratisaṃskārayantasya, sarvvarātrī pratisaṃskarayitavyaṃ

§ 17.7.15A2. imaṃ tvayā pratisaṃskārayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-#

prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-#

“reparieren lassen”

⇒ prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-skāraya-, prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ

§ 14.12.13B2. tāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā. yadi tāva sasvāmikā bhavati, tena pratisaṃskārāpetavyā (Hs. °kāroyetavyā)

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ

prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ

⇒ a-pratisaṃskṛta~, prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-s-kāraya-, prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-, su-pratisaṃskṛta~

§ 12.3.11B1. ye varṣāṃ upagacchiṣyanti, te pratisaṃskariṣyanti

§ 12.5.11B2. prakṛtya͡iva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā, tato vihārakā pratisaṃskarttavyāḥ

§ 12.13.12A1. upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “... vayaṃ pratisaṃskariṣyāma” tti

§ 13.3.12B1. ye bhagavān varṣāṃ vasiṣyanti te pratisaṃskariṣyanti

§ 13.9.12B3. muṇḍaharmmiyā pratisaṃskarttavyā

§ 14.12.13B2. tāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā. ... uddiṣṭakā dani yasya bhavati, tena pratisaṃskarttavyā

§ 14.13.13B2. atha dāni na͡iva sasvāmiko bhavati, nâpi uddiṣṭako, sarvvasaṃghena pratisaṃskarttavyo

§ 16.8.14B3. vihārakāṇāṃ kālena kālaṃ khaṇḍaphuṭṭaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ

§ 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko ... . ya ete droṇīśramaṇakā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti

§ 21.8.20B5. kaṭhinaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ

§ 22.7.21A3. (cakkalī ...) kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyā, kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyā

§ 55.10.47A2. (geṇḍuka~ ...) kālena kālaṃ sīvayitavyo kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyo usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

prati-saṃ-√kram

prati-saṃ-√kram

“stehenbleiben“ oder “zusammenkommen”#?

☞ § 44.1, Anm. 1

⇒ prati-√kram

§ 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkramati

Vgl. § 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pratisaṃdhi~

*pratissaya-vinodana~

“Drohungen vertreibend”;

vgl. Pā. parissaya-vinodana (It 112.4); *pratissaya < Pā. parissaya (“Gefahr”) < Pkt. parissava (“Abflüsse”) < Skt. parisrava (“Fluß”)

☞ § 36.6, Anm. 6

§ 36.6.29B5. anāgārā pragṛhṇanti pratissayavinodanā<ṃ> (Hs. pratisaṃya{mya}v°) (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pratīccha-

pratīccha-

⇒ paṭiccha-, praticcha-

§ 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” ... tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā

§ 4.12.5A5. atha dān’ āha “bhaviṣyatî”ti pratīcchitavyaṃ

§ 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati ... cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppikhajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā

比丘威儀法詞典

pratītya-samutpāda-kauśalya~#

pratītya-samutpāda-kauśalya~#

“die Fähigkeit, mit der bedingten Entstehung umzugehen”

☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1

§ 7.6.8B4. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ āyatanakauśalyaṃ pratītyasamutpādakauśalyaṃ sthānāsthānakauśalyaṃ

§ 9.5.10A2. śekhayitavyo dhātukauśalyaṃ skandhak° āyatanak° pratītyasamutpādak°

比丘威儀法詞典

pratyaṃśa~ (BHS, SWTF)

praty-acchaṭikā~#

“Erwiderung durch Schnippen mit den Fingern”

⇒ acchaṭikā~

§ 18.22.16B1. yadi tāva tahi koci pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati tena pratyacchaṭikā karttavyā (≒ § 19.8.18A2)

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-andhakāraka~#

praty-andhakāraka~#

“(bei Tage oder in der Nacht) dunkel”;

vgl. BHS. praty-andhakāra (“a counterpart of night” [BHSD, s.v.], “Schatten verbreitend” [Schmidt, Nachtr., s.v.])

§ 25.12.22B7. atha dāni pratyandhakārako vihārako bhavati, na kṣamati pātreṇa pātraṃ mārggituṃ. atha khalu hastena mārggitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-amitra~

praty-amitra~

“Gegner”

§ 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo vadhakānāṃ pratyarthikānāṃ pratyamitrāṇāṃ arthakāmo hitakāmo

比丘威儀法詞典

pratyaya~

pratyaya~

⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~

§ 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati”

比丘威儀法詞典

pratyarthika~

praty-allīya-#

“sich an jdn. wenden”

☞ § 8.2, Anm. 2

⇒ praty-ā-līya-

§ 10.1.10A3. te antevāsikā ācārikasya niśrayaṃ gṛhṇiya na͡iva allīyanti na pratyallīyanti

§ 10.2.10A4. ye dāni asmākaṃ <na> allīyanti na pratyal<l>īyanti, kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ?

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-avekṣa- (praty-ava-√īkṣ)

praty-avekṣa- (praty-ava-√īkṣ)

⇒ su-pratyavekṣita~

§ 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena āsanaṃ pratyavekṣitavyaṃ

§ 5.9.6B7. hastehi pratyavekṣiyāṇaṃ anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 6.9.7B7. hastena pratyavekṣiyāṇa ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi ... upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 13.5.12B1. ete dāni bhikṣavo varṣopagatā bhavanti, te{na}hi vihārakā pratyavekṣitavyā

§ 15.7.14A3. praviśiya cīvaravaṃśo tāva pratyavekṣitavyo

§ 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ca pratyavekṣitavyaḥ

§ 25.15.23A2. ullapantena kīlakaṃ hastena pratyavekṣitvā <ullapitavyaṃ>

§ 41.16.34B6. senāpati, pānīyaṃ pratyavekṣituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-ā-rocaya-#

praty-ā-rocaya-#

“wiedergeben, erzählen”;

vgl. BHSD, ārocayati; BhiVin(Ma-L) § 15, BI.4.6. pratyārociti

§ 1.3.1B3. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati (= § 2.3.2B3, § 3.3.3B1, § 4.3.4B1, § 7.2.8A7, § 9.2.9B6, § 37.2.30A1, § 42.4.36A6, § 47.2.40B5 § 49.2.42A5 usw.; ≒ § 36.2.29B1)

比丘威儀法詞典

praty-ā-līya-

praty-ā-līya-

“sich an jdn. wenden”#

☞ § 8.2, Anm. 2

⇒ praty-allīya

§ 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ, ye ime asmākaṃ na͡iv’ allīyaṃti (Hs. na avallīyaṃti) na pratyālīyanti?

比丘威儀法詞典

pradeśaka~#

prapāṇḍara~ (BHS)

“strahlend weiß, sehr weiß”;

vgl. Skt. prapāṇḍura

☞ § 23.3, Anm. 5

§ 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ulloko bhavati prapāṇḍaro (Hs. °ṇḍarā), bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā

§ 23.3.21A6. madhyamako nāma vihārako, <bhūmi> bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā, na ca bhavati ulloyo prapāṇḍaro

§ 23.3.21A6. bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, nâpi bhavati ulloyo prapāṇḍaro, na ha͡iva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako

比丘威儀法詞典

prapāta-niśrita~#

prapāta-niśrita~#

“am Rand eines Steilhanges liegend”

⇒ dari-niśrita~

§ 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) mallakatalā khaḍā khaṇitavyā prapātaniśritā (Hs. °taṃ) vā

§ 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ullā varccagharaṃ dhovanti gacchati, antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya

§ 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita (Hs. °nisṛtā) bhavati varcakuṭī, kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ

§ 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃ câpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-pīḍita~

pra-pīḍita~

“bedrängt”

⇒ ut-pīḍita~, up-pīḍita~, √pīḍ

§ 19.7.18A1. tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ, yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-bhāta~

pra-bhāta~

§ 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-bhūta~

pra-bhūta~

§ 41.14.34B4. tehi dāni mārggiya mārggiya prabhūtaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prabhūta-jātarūpa-rajata-vittopakaraṇa~# (vitta-upa°)

prabhūta-jātarūpa-rajata-vittopakaraṇa~# (vitta-upa°)

“viel Gold, Silber und Vermögen besitzend”

☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3

§ 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo ... prabhūtajātarūparajatavittopakaraṇo ...

比丘威儀法詞典

prabhūta-dāsī-dāsa-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~ (SWTF)

prabhūta-dāsī-dāsa-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~ (SWTF)

“viele Sklavinnen, Sklaven, Arbeiter und Tagelöhner besitzend”

☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3

§ 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo ... prabhūtadāsīdāsakarmmakarapauruṣeyo

比丘威儀法詞典

prabhūta-dhana-dhānya-kośa-koṣṭhāgāra~ (°ṣṭha-ag°) (SWTF)

prabhūta-dhana-dhānya-kośa-koṣṭhāgāra~ (°ṣṭha-ag°) (SWTF)

“viel Geld, Vorräte, Schatzkammern und Vorratshäuser besitzend”

☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3

§ 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo mahādhano mahābhogo prabhūtadhanadhānyakośakoṣṭhāgāro ...

比丘威儀法詞典

prabhūta-hasty-aśva-aja-gav’-eḍaka~#

prabhūta-hasty-aśva-aja-gav’-eḍaka~#

“eine Menge Elefanten, Pferde, Ziegen, Kühe und Schafe besitzend”

☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3

§ 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo ... prabhūtahastyaśva-ajagav’-eḍako ... prabhṛti

§ 12.12.12A1. tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ, vṛddhāntato prabhṛti yāva avarṣakaparyantaṃ

§ 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo

§ 44.6.39A5. tato koṇakāto prabhṛti sukhākaṃ mocayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prabheda~

prabheda~

⇒ saṃkṣipta-vistara-prabheda~

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-majja-#

pra-majja-#

“nachlässig sein”;

< Skt. pramādyati, °ate; vgl. Pā. pamajjati

§ 4.19.6A2. mā pramajji jinaśāsane (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pramāṇa~

pra-yata~

⇒ a-prayata~

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-yāta~

pra-yāta~

“abgereist”

§ 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (?; Hs. yathā pāṭito)”

§ 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he ... śramaṇa sārtho (Hs. mātā) prayāto (Hs. prajātā) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti

§ 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.”

§ 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-yukta~

pravarddhaka~

“arrogant”#?; wörtl. “vermehrend, steigernd”

§ 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati usreṇako vā pravarddhako vā anarthakuśalo vā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pravāta-gandhika~#

praviveka~ (BHS, SWTF)

“Abgeschiedenheit, Einsamkeit”

§ 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena (Hs. prativek°) durabhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-√viś

pra-viṣṭa~

⇒ pra-√viś

比丘威儀法詞典

praviṣṭaka~ (BHS)

pra-vṛtta~

§ 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (Hs. yathā pāṭito)”

比丘威儀法詞典

pravṛttaka~

praveśaka~

⇒ gṛha-praveśaka~, ghara-praveśaka~

比丘威儀法詞典

praveśanika~

pra-vy-ā-hara-

“sagen, sprechen; antworten#”

⇒ vy-ā-hara-

§ 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā <kiṃ bhaṇasi>” tti pravyāharituṃ

§ 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ

§ 33.14.28A6. te ete gṛhi-ālāpena ālapanti vā pravyāharanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti

§ 33.17.28A7. evaṃ pravyāharttavyaṃ (Hs.°ttavyā) (= Uddāna [IV].30B5)

比丘威儀法詞典

prasāda~

prasāda~

“Mitleid; Vertrauen”

§ 31.5.25B4. atha dāni corā sa-prasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu

§ 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo

§ 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-vrajita~

pra-vrajita~

“Wanderasket”

§ 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā

§ 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ ... etaṃ bhaktaṃ ... āgantukasya gamikasya gṛhasthasya pravrajitasyêti (= § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3)

§ 4.20.6A2. atha dāni pravrajitasya bhavati, nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā

§ 4.20.6A3. suduṣkaraṃ pravrajitasya dānaṃ (vs)

§ 6.5.7B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti: ... gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko?

§ 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... (≒ § 12.1.11A6)

§ 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.”

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-√śaṃs

pra-√śaṃs

⇒ pra-śasta~, anu-pra-√śaṃs

§ 26.1.23A4. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ekatyaṃ yavāgūṃ nindanti, ekatyaṃ praśaṃsanti (Hs. °saṃs°)

§ 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti (Hs. °saṃs°) vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayanti

比丘威儀法詞典

praśaṃsā~

praśaṃsā~

§ 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-śasta~

praśvāsa~#

“Urin; das Urinieren”;

praśvāsaṃ + √kṛ “Wasser lassen; urinieren”;

vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 142, Anm. 2

⇒ praśvāsaka~, prasrāva~, uccāra~, ucchvāsa~, uśvāsa~

§ 19.2.17B4. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti

§ 19.2.17B4. yathā uṣṭrā vā ... eva<m i>me śramaṇakā prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti

§ 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ...

§ 19.6.17B7. praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ ... “praśvāsaṃ kariṣyan” ti <praviśati?>

§ 19.6.17B7. tahiṃ ca bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo praśvāsaṃ karoti

§ 19.7.18A1. evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 19.43.19A4)

§ 19.7.18A1. tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ, yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati

§ 19.8.18A2. iminā tāva āgamayitavyaṃ yāva praśvāso kṛto

§ 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi praśvāso karttavyo

§ 19.13.18A3. atha dāni praśvāsena uppīḍito bhavati, na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa ...

§ 19.13.18A4. atha khalu ekatam’ aṃte upaviśiya praśvāso karttavyo

§ 19.15.18A4. tenâpi dāni praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo ... cchorayitavyo

§ 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti

§ 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābutumbako vā thapayitavyo. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ

§ 19.18.18A7. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ karitavyaṃ

§ 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya ...

§ 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso (Hs. ghaṃśvato) gaccheyā

§ 19.31.18B6. atha khalu ekamantena praśvāso karttavyo

§ 19.33.18B6. tenâpi praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa, ... cchorayitavyaṃ

§ 19.35.18B7. gocaraṃ praviśati, prakṛty’ eva tāva praśvāsaṃ kariya praviśitavyaṃ

§ 19.36.18B7. praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ

§ 19.36.19A1. kuḍḍa agrato kariyāṇa praśvāso karttavyo

§ 19.37.19A1. nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ

§ 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ?

§ 19.37.19A1. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ

§ 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ

§ 19.43. evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [II].20A6)

§ 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantasya ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsaka~#

praśvāsaka~#

“Urin”

⇒ praśvāsa~, prasrāva~, uccāra~, ucchvāsa~, uśvāsa~

§ 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā pa<ti>tako yeva praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsa-kāra~

praśvāsa-kāra~

“sein Wasser zu lassen beabsichtigend, urinieren wollend”

☞ § 44.1, Anm. 3

⇒ praśvāsa-kāraka~, uśvāsa-kāra~

§ 44.6.39A3. atha dāni bhikṣu virātrakāle uśvāsakāro vā praśvāsakāro vā nirddhāvati, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsa-kāraka~

praśvāsa-kāraka~

“sein Wasser zu lassen beabsichtigend, urinieren wollend”

☞ § 44.1, Anm. 3

⇒ praśvāsa-kāra~, uśvāsa-kāraka~, pāda-vandaka~

§ 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre uśvāsakārako vā praśvāsakārako vā nirddhāvito bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsa-kuṭī~#

praśvāsa-kuṭī~#

“Pissoir”;

⇒ prasrāva-kuṭī~, varcca-kuṭikā~, varc(c)a-kuṭī~, varcca-kuṭīkā~

§ 19.3.17B5. tena hi praśvāsakuṭī nāma karttavyā. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ

§ 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ ... praśvāsena uppīḍito praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ ...

§ 19.7.18A1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakena͡iva praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ

§ 19.8.18A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aśabdakarṇṇikāye praśvāsakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ. atha khalu acchaṭikāṃ karantena praśvāsakuṭiṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, utthiyāṇaṃ praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ

§ 19.16.18A5. atha dāni praśvāsakuṭī na bhavati, ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsa-kṛta~#

praśvāsa-kṛta~#

“(ein Bedürfnis) verspürend, sein Wasser zu lassen”

☞ § 19.12, Anm. 1

⇒ uśvāsa-kṛta~, samudācāra-kṛta~

§ 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, utthiyāṇaṃ praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ

§ 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, samudācāramātrakeṇa eva gantavyaṃ

§ 19.36.18B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviṣṭaḥ praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ...

§ 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati, praśvāsakṛto bhavati ...

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsa-ghaṭa~#

praśvāsa-ghaṭa~#

“Urin-Topf (oder -Kübel)”

⇒ praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~, prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, prasrāva-kumbhikā~

§ 19.16.18A5. atha dāni praśvāsakuṭī na bhavati, ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsaghaṭo (Hs. °sapaṭe) sthāpayitavyo

§ 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ

§ 19.23.18B2. atha dāni saṃghe praśvāsaghaṭo na bhavati, paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā

比丘威儀法詞典

praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~#

praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~#

“Urin-Gefäß”

⇒ praśvāsa-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~, prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, prasrāva-kumbhikā~

§ 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

praṣṭavya~

pra-sanna~

⇒ a-prasanna~, kruddha-prasanna~, śraddhā-prasanna~

§ 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno

比丘威儀法詞典

prasanna-citta~ (BHS, SWTF)

prasanna-citta~ (BHS, SWTF)

“erfreuten Herzens; zufrieden”

§ 41.10.34A6. so dāni prasannacitto āha

§ 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni

比丘威儀法詞典

praskandikā~#

pra-sthita~

§ 4.16.5B2. bhadrakaṃ (Hs. °kā) kṣaṇamuhūrttaṃ prasthitaṃ (Hs. °itā) (vs)

§ 46.1.40A3. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikā gocarāye prasthitā

§ 46.2.40A5. yūyaṃ kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthitā

§ 46.4.40A6. kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-sphoṭa-#

prasrāva~

“Urin; das Urinieren”

⇒ praśvāsa~, praśvāsaka~, uccāra~, ucchvāsa~, uccāraprasrāva- kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~, uśvāsa~

§ 19.11.18A3. atha khalu prasrāvaṃ kṛtvā cchatti utthitavyaṃ

§ 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo (Hs. vartt°), yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā

§ 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā ... grahetuṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prasrāva-karaṇa~

prasrāva-karaṇa~

“das Membrum virile”#

§ 18.10.16A1. nâpi dāni draviḍena viya prasrāvakaraṇaṃ (Hs. praśrā°) gṛhṇitvā varccakumbhikā gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prasrāva-kuṭī~ (BHS)

prasrāva-kumbhikā~#

“Urinflasche”

⇒ prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, varccakumbhikā~, praśvāsa-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~

§ 8.5.9A1. kheṭakaṭāhako nikkālayitavyo prasrāvakumbhikā nikkālayitavyā

§ 10.5.10A6. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbhikā praveśayitavyā

§ 10.5.10A6. evaṃ aparaṃ divasaṃ prasrāvakumbhikā niṣkāśayitavyā

比丘威儀法詞典

*prasvedati

*prasvedati

“schwitzt”;

vgl. Skt. prasvedate (“in Schweiß geraten”)

§ 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi

比丘威儀法詞典

pra-hara-

pra-hara-

§ 41.20.35A4. na brāhmaṇasya prahareya (vs)

比丘威儀法詞典

prahāṇa~

prahāṇa~

(1) “Meditation” (BHS);

vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 298~299, Anm. 3;

☞ § 19.19, Anm. 2 zur Wendung prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati

⇒ dvitīya~ prahāṇa~, paścima~ prahāṇa~, purima~ prahāṇa~, prahāṇika~

§ 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ...

§ 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsaghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā

§ 22.4.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato ...

§ 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ...

§ 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ...

§ 40.15.33A7. atha dāni paṭipāṭikāye dūredūraṃ prahāṇasya upaviṣṭā bhavanti, ekena vāretavyaṃ

§ 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi

§ 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti

§ 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ (☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1) pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā

§ 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, ...

§ 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo

§ 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, ...

§ 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo

§ 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1)

§ 56.1.47A2. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti

§ 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ

§ 57.3.47B2. bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ

§ 57.6.47B4. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā ... nirddhāvitavyaṃ

§ 57.7.47B5. prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ

§ 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti

(2) “Meditationsraum”#

⇒ prahāṇasya ā-mantraya-

§ 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo

§ 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati

§ 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ

§ 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ

§ 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ

§ 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti

§ 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha?

§ 29.2.24A7. duṣkṛtaṃ ... evaṃ ca yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha

§ 29.3.24A7. tena hi <na> kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdituṃ

§ 29.5.24B2. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa prahāṇe upaveṣṭuṃ

§ 40.15.33A6. prahāṇe vārentena (Hs. cā°) yadi bhūmyāstaro bhavati, ...

§ 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā

§ 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti

§ 54.1.46A1. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇe pracalāyaṃti

§ 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti

§ 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti

§ 56.3.47A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6)

§ 57.1.47A7. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyānaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti

§ 56.3.47A4. atha khalu vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ

§ 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena upānahā nikkhāsiya ...

§ 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ

§ 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo. sthapitvā prahāṇam upaviśitavyaṃ

§ 58.1.48A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭāḥ ... (= § 59.1.48A6, § 61.1.49A2)

§ 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena ... “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ

§ 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena ... (= § 61.3.49A3)

§ 60.1.48B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇam upaviṣṭāḥ samānā ...

§ 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena ... kaṇḍūyituṃ

§ 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, ...

§ 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ...

§ 62.5.50A1. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma karttuṃ usw.

(3)

⇒ durggandha-prahāṇārthaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prahāṇaka~

prahāṇaka~

“Meditationsraum”#

⇒ prahāṇa~ (2)

§ 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 22.1.20B6. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇakaṃ upaviṣṭo

§ 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prahāṇa-śālā~

prahāṇa-śālā~

“Meditationsraum”;

vgl. BHSD, S. 390a, Z. 13f.; Poṣ(Hu) 267, Anm. 1; Lüders 1940: 612, Z.1; ib. 614, Anm. 3; Bailey 1955: 24

§ 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahim bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā? (≒ § 3.6.3B4)

§ 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... amukahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā

§ 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā?

§ 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ

§ 53.6.45A6. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo, paścāt prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo

§ 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo

§ 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ

§ 53.13.45B4. sopānaśīrṣe nirvvāpayitvā prahāṇaśālāyāṃ (Hs. prahāṇarolāyāṃ) dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo

§ 53.17.45B5. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ

§ 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo

§ 57.4.47B2. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ

§ 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti

§ 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prahāṇasya ā-mantraya-

prahāṇasya ā-mantraya-

“den mit der Verwaltung des Meditationsraumes beauftragten (Mönch) um Erlaubnis bitten”?

☞ § 18.28, Anm. 3

⇒ dharmmaśravaṇasya ā-mantraya-, ā-mantraya-

§ 18.28.16B4. prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ

§ 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ. prahāṇasya vā āmantriya gantavyaṃ

§ 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ

§ 60.4.48B6. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo khajjati, khajjanako bhavati, prahāṇasyâmantriya gantavyaṃ

§ 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, nirddhāviya vijṛmbhitavyaṃ. prahāṇasya vā āmantriya gantavyaṃ

§ 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmant<r>iya gantavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prahāṇika~ (BHS)

prahāṇika~ (BHS)

“meditierend”;

vgl. BHSD, s.vv. prā̆hāṇika; SWTF III 235 prāhāṇika; Lüders 1961: 83; Damsteegt 1978: 247; Poṣ(Hu) 298~299, Anm. 3; IBInsc I 650

⇒ prahāṇa~

§ 42.19.37A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi

比丘威儀法詞典

prahāsa~

prahāsa~

“Gelächter”

§ 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā

比丘威儀法詞典

prākaṭa~

prāg eva (BHS, SWTF)

“um so mehr, erst recht; zumeist”;

vgl. BHSD, s.v. prāg eva (“formerly; how much more [or less], a fortiori, not to speak of”); SWTF III 226a prāk (2)

☞ § 34.6, Anm.1

⇒ prāgo

§ 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti

比丘威儀法詞典

prāgo#

prāgo#

“(zu) früh”;

vgl. Skt. prāk, prage, BHS. atiprāgas, Pā. ati-ppago

☞ § 39.12, Anm. 1

⇒ prāg eva

§ 39.12.31B1. vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. āraṇyakâpi tāva nâgacchanti”

§ 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. grāmāntikā ca bhikṣavo nâgacchanti”

比丘威儀法詞典

prāñjalī-kṛta~ (BHS[Mvu], SWTF)

prāñjalī-kṛta~ (BHS[Mvu], SWTF)

“die zusammengelegten Händen vorstreckend” (als Geste des Respekts);

vgl. Pā. pañjalī-kata

§ 57.7.47B5. vṛddhānte ... praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhinikuṭitakena prāñjalīkṛtena gantavyaṃ yāvat pratisandhi

比丘威儀法詞典

prā-vṛta~

prā-vṛta~

⇒ nagna-prāvṛta~, samanta-prāvṛta~, prā-vara-

§ 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ

§ 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikena śeyyāsanena prāvṛtena varccakuṭī praviśituṃ

§ 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prāṇaka~

prāṇaka~

§ 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi ohayiyantaṃ

§ 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi vā khajjantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣayantam

§ 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati, pakṣīhi ohayiyate

§ 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyaṃtāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ

§ 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā{ṃ}

§ 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcāṃ pīṭhāṃ ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyantāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ (≒ § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A6)

§ 13.3.12B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā?

§ 13.15.12B6. mañcā bhittito mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ, yathā prāṇakehi na khādyeyā

§ 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā

§ 15.7.14A3. cīvaravaṃśo tāva pratyavekṣitavyo. anekāye prāṇakehi khāditako bhavati

§ 15.7.14A3. yadi tāva prāṇakehi khāyitako bhavati bhagnako vā, ...

§ 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ saprāṇakāni vā adhotakāni vā

§ 18.11.16A1. atha dāni varccakumbhikā saprāṇakā bhavati, na dāni <kṣamati> vaktuṃ, “āyuṣmanto, saprāṇakā varccakuṭikā.” ... yathā jñāye saprāṇakêty abhijñānaṃ

§ 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi vā khajjanti

§ 24.4.22A2. nâpi kṣamati kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ, mā saprāṇako bhaveya

§ 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ...

§ 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu

§ 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti ... (≒ § 15.3.14A1)usw.

比丘威儀法詞典

prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~#

prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~#

“hunderttausend Myriaden Koṭis von Lebewesen”

§ 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭīniyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ...

比丘威儀法詞典

prātimokṣa~ (BHS, SWTF)

prātimokṣa~ (BHS, SWTF)

§ 7.5.8B3. abhivinayo nāma prātimokṣo saṃkṣiptavistaraprabhedena

比丘威儀法詞典

prātimokṣa-sūtra~ (SWTF>)

prātimokṣa-sūtra~ (SWTF>)

§ 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśiṣyati, ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6)

§ 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi”

§ 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśitavyaṃ (≒ § 3.11.4A3)

§ 2.10.3A4. tato vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ ussārayitavyaṃ

比丘威儀法詞典

prānta~ (BHS, SWTF)

prānta~ (BHS, SWTF)

“abgelegen”

§ 39.29.32A7. durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni (Hs. prāptāni) viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni

比丘威儀法詞典

prāpuṇa- (BHS[Mvu, Sukh])

prāpuṇa- (BHS[Mvu, Sukh])

“jmd (Gen.) zukommen; zustehen”#;

< Skt. pra-√āp; vgl. SWTF, III 231a, prāp (2); Pā. pāpuṇati

☞ § 8.13, Anm. 1; § 18.8, Anm. 1 zur Wendung navakānte vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati

⇒ prāpuṇe-

§ 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.”

§ 8.13.9B2. atha dāni dvitīyena saha prāpuṇati vihāraṃ, upādhyāyena jānitavyaṃ: yadi ...

§ 18.8.15B6. navakānte vā paṭipāṭ{ṭ}ikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, tena tāni ...

§ 19.19.18A7. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati

§ 31.23.26A6. pṛcchitavyaṃ “āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati?”

§ 31.23.26A6. yadi tāva jalpati “prāpuṇati” tti, vihārako gṛhṇitavyo

§ 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti

§ 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati

§ 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti

§ 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, ... so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti

§ 54.2.46A2. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati

§ 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati

§ 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi (Hs. cār°)”

§ 54.12.46A7. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.”

§ 55.5.46B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati. utthehi vārehi (Hs. cār°)” tti

§ 55.6.46B7. vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati.”

比丘威儀法詞典

prāpuṇe- (BHS[Mvu])

prāpuṇe- (BHS[Mvu])

“jmd (Gen.) zukommen”#;

< Skt. pra-√āp

⇒ prāpuṇa-

§ 19.5.17B7. (das Pissoir) tailena mrakṣayitavyā navakāntena vā uddiṣṭakena vā paṭipāṭikāye{na} vā yasya vā prāpuṇeti

比丘威儀法詞典

prāpta~

prāmāṇika~

⇒ pramāṇika~

比丘威儀法詞典

prāmodya~

prāmodya~

⇒ prīti-prāmodya~

比丘威儀法詞典

prā-vara- (BHS, SWTF)

prā-vara- (BHS, SWTF)

“sich anziehen”;

< Skt. prā-√vṛ

⇒ prā-vare-, prā-vṛta~, ni-vāsaya-

§ 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ nivāsayitavyaṃ, kathaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5)

§ 11.11.11A2. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ sāṃghikaṃ prāvariyaṃ (Abs.) dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ

§ 11.14.11A3. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prāvariya śayati ...

§ 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 31.7.25B6. tehi dāni prāvariya gaṇṭhipāśakaṃ obandhiya āmantriya praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.9.25B7. pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā (lies: prāvaritvā?) anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ

§ 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> ... nivāsantasya vā, cīvaraṃ prāvarantasya, ...

§ 41.22.35A6. ārāmacaraṇakaṃ prāvaritvā āsanaṃ prajñapetavyaṃ

§ 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya prāvariya ...

§ 44.6.39A4. bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya ...

§ 45.4.39B6. cīvarāṇi prāvaritvā (Hs. pravāritvā) gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ

§ 46.3.40A6. evaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ (= § 46.7.40B2)

§ 46.4.40A6. prāvarantena grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ āvellayitavyaṃ

§ 46.5.40A7. prāvaramāṇena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvarakaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ

§ 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu ... anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati

§ 47.5.40B7. cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā ... praviśitavyaṃ

§ 47.5.40B7. prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ

§ 47.6.40B7. prāvaritvā gantavyaṃ

§ 47.6.40B7. parimaṇḍalaṃ cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā ...

比丘威儀法詞典

prāvaraṇa~